Home

Paradyne 3910 User's Manual

1. Overview Table E 1 in this appendix provides the ASCII character table Table E 1 1 of 4 ASCII Characters Hexadecimal Decimal Control Key ASCII Value ASCII Value Character 00 000 NUL CTRL 01 001 SCH CTRL A 02 002 STX CTRL B 03 003 EXT CTRL C 04 004 EOT CTRL D 05 005 ENQ CTRL E 06 006 ACK CTRL F 07 007 BEL CTRL G 08 008 BS CTRL H 09 009 HT CTRL I 0A 010 LF CTRL J 0B 011 VT CTRL K 0C 012 FF CTRL L 00 013 CR CTRL M 014 SO CTRL N OF 015 SI CTRL O 10 016 DLE CTRL P 11 017 DC1 CTRL Q 12 018 DC2 CTRL R 13 019 DC3 CTRL S 14 020 DC4 CTRL T 15 021 NAK CTRL U 16 022 SYN CTRL V 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 E 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table E 1 2 of 4 ASCII Characters Hexadecimal Decimal Control Key ASCII Value ASCII Value Character 17 023 ETB CTRL W 18 024 CAN CTRL X 19 025 EM CTRL Y 1A 026 SUM CTRL Z 1B 027 ESC CTRL 1C 028 FS CTRL 1D 029 GS CTRL 1E 030 HS CTRL Ax 1F 031 US CTRL 20 032 spacebar 21 033 22 034 23 035 24 036 25 037 26 038 amp 27 039 f 28 040 29 041 2A 042 2B 043 2 044 2 045 2 046 2F 047 30 048 0 31 049 1 32 050 2 33 051 3 34 052 4 35 053 5 36 054 6 37 055 7 38 056 8 39 057 9 3A 058 E 2 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 ASCII Character
2. L8 L8 The function field yyyyyy displays the function you selected Active Delete or Skip The address field xxx displays the network management address of the modem to be changed The valid address field range is from 001 to 256 To increment digits within the address field xxx use the lt 1 and keys to position the cursor under the digit that will be incremented Press the F2 1 key to increment the digit Press Enter Ent to implement the function yyyyyy you selected Active Delete or Skip The message Command Complete appears on the second line of the LCD to indicate that the poll list change has occurred If the message Poll List Check appears you have attempted to delete an address that was not on the poll list or you have attempted to add an address that was already on the poll list If the message Poll List Error appears you are in a point to point mode that does not support secondary channel V 29 If the message Poll Lst too Big appears you have entered a number greater than the maximum number of downstream devices To return to the selected function Active Delete or Skip press the A key The address automatically increments upon returning to this function To exit this function Active Delete or Skip and remain in the PList Change branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the Z3 key The Add function does not appear in Remote mode or on con
3. Press any function key to begin the transfer RemClone Status A Remote L8 8 The local modem s LCD displays Establish Remote indicating the modem is attempting to establish a Remote Cloning Download session with the remote modem If unsuccessful the modem remains in the Download Transfer mode The LCD s top line displays RemClone Failed and the bottom line displays one of the following messages Incompat Modulat The modems are connected but are using a modulation scheme other than V 33 V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 V 29 or TMp No Response The remote modem is not a 3900 Series modem or the connection between the two modems is poor Access Disabled The remote modem s Access from Remote configuration is disabled Password Invalid The local and remote modems passwords do not match Correct the problem and attempt another download from the local modem If this fails contact your service representative No Circuit There is no connection between the local and remote modem After successful establishment of a Remote Cloning Download session the following screens appear RemClone Status A Initializing A lt 8 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 41 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems RemClone Status XN tae L8 L8 As data banks are transferred the local and
4. Bits configuration option is set to 7 NOTE If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT or V 25bis Async then the total character size must equal 10 bits Total character size consists of start data parity and stop bits V 25bis Async must use 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit The total character size for Error Control mode Direct mode or Buffer mode must be 11 bits or less The AT prefix determines parity of the async character Asyn Stop Bits 1 Nxt 1 2 This configuration option only appears if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous Number of Stop Bits Selects 1 or 2 bits to signal the end of an asynchronous character NOTE If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT or V 25bis Async then the total character size must equal 10 bits Total character size consists of start data parity and stop bits V 25bis Async must use 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit The total character size for Error Control mode Direct mode or Buffer mode must be 11 bits or less The AT prefix determines the number of stop bits via autobauding 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 11 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 1 3 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options DTR Action Ignore Nxt Ignore Stndrd RS232 CntrlsOnHook CnirlsTxMute Data Terminal Ready Action DTR is a signal from the DTE to the modem indicating that the DTE is connected and ready for
5. RmtCmnded The modem has disconnected due to a V 32 Cleardown received Disc from the remote modem Talk Mode The modem is in Talk mode Firmware DownldOnly A local download of firmware or a remote cloning of firmware has Download Mode failed The modem is currently in a Download Only mode in which Result only another download attempt is possible Frmware A local download of firmware or a remote cloning of firmware was Upgrade successful RemClone A remote cloning of firmware has failed This message appears on Failed the local modem s LCD 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 11 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 3 3 4 of 4 Top Level Menu Status Status Message Firmware Remote Clone A remote cloning of firmware was successful This message Download OK appears on the local modem s LCD Result Cont Bcast Clone A broadcast cloning of firmware has completed You must look Done under the Control branch for cloning results This message appears on the local modem s LCD AT Command Reset by AT The modem has performed a reset in response to an ATZ Reset command command Messages listed in Table 3 4 are common operational messages that occur during modem operation These messages normally appear on the second line of the LCD Table 3 4 Common Operational Messages Common Operational Message Please Wait A command to a local device takes more than two seconds to complete
6. AT Cmnd Mode Normal Nxt Normal No ERROR NoStrapOrERR This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT AT Command Mode Determines how the modem responds to valid and invalid AT commands m Normal Allows normal operation of the AT command set The modem acts upon all valid AT commands and issues the ERROR result code for invalid commands If a string with multiple commands is entered then an invalid command within that string will prevent the execution of subsequent valid commands m No ERROR Operates similar to Normal mode however the modem does not issue an ERROR result code for invalid commands When an invalid command is encountered the modem ignores it and issues the OK result code If a string with multiple commands is entered then an invalid command within that string will not prevent the execution of subsequent valid commands m No Strap or ERROR Ignores all AT commands including valid commands that cause a configuration option to change Only non configuring commands for example ATD ATA and ATI are executed the ERROR result code is never returned NOTE Since this configuration option affects AT commands it cannot be changed by the AT amp F command However it can be changed by selecting a factory preset configuration via the DCP The AT command is S Register S84 n where n is 0 or 231 for Normal 1 or 232 for No ERROR and 2 or 233 for No Strap or ERROR V25bis Coding ASCII Nxt
7. The modem does not switch Verify that the Auto Dial Standby configuration option is enabled Refer back to leased line operation to Leased Line in Chapter 4 B 2 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Troubleshooting Table B 4 Modem DTE Connection Symptom Action The modem does not accept or echo back AT commands Verify that the cable between the Async port of the DTE and the modem is a standard RS 232 cable Null modem cables also known as crossover cables do not work in this application Verify that the Command Character Echo configuration option is enabled Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 4 Verify that the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 4 Verify that the Result Codes configuration option is enabled Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 4 Reload the Async Dial factory configuration area to guarantee that all configuration options are returned to their proper setting Make sure that all AT commands are terminated with a carriage return Verify that the Carriage Return Character configuration option matches what is used by the DTE Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 4 Verify that the DTE has a valid character format Valid format consists of 8 data bits with no parity or 7 data bits with even odd mark or space parity Verify that the DTE s data rate is supported by the modem Refer to the Async DTE Rate configuration option in the DTE Int
8. COMSPHERE 3900 SERIES MODEMS MODELS 3910 AND 3911 POINT TO POINT MULTIPOINT INSTALLATION AND OPERATION MANUAL Document No 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Models 3910 and 3911 Point to Point Multipoint Installation and Operation Manual 3910 A2 GN32 30 4th Edition November 1996 Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual For the 3900 Series standalone modems the Universal Service Order Code USOC for Permissive mode is RJ11C The Canadian equivalent to RJ11C is CA11A For 3900 Series carrier mounted modems the USOC for Permissive mode is RJ21X The Canadian equivalent to RJ21X is CA21A FCC Registration number See label on modem Ringer Equivalence number REN See label on modem Model 3910 Canadian Certification number See label on modem Canadian DOC Load number See label on modem Model 3911 Canadian Certification number See label on modem Canadian DOC Load number See label on modem Warranty Sales and Service Information Contact your sales or service representative directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentation or training use one of the following methods e Via the Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http www paradyne com Via Telephone Call our automate
9. COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems rates automatic control 4 35 dial line 1 10 4 30 5 17 leased line 1 10 4 34 5 18 rear connector plate 1 4 rear panel connectors 1 4 1 5 2 3 C 2 Record Status branch 3 24 3 25 Remote access password 3 65 3 67 3 68 4 5 4 8 4 49 branch 3 8 3 65 3 68 remote digital loopback test 3 49 3 50 requirements ac power 1 9 government 1 5 1 7 reset control 3 31 3 32 result codes enable disable 4 22 5 7 extended 4 23 5 8 list 5 3 5 4 numeric or word 4 23 5 7 Return Material Authorization 1 6 ringer equivalence number REN 1 5 RMA number 1 6 S Register list 5 14 5 28 Security access messages 3 13 branch 3 8 6 4 6 13 configuration options 6 13 6 16 database tables 6 2 6 3 6 18 6 19 passwords 6 2 6 4 6 16 6 17 Select key 2 10 2 11 3 7 3 8 self test 3 47 3 48 self test 2 5 serial number Ser 3 20 service line 3 35 shared diagnostic control panel SDCP 1 5 3 3 soft straps See configuration options software download 3 35 3 42 speaker 1 3 3 31 specifications technical 1 8 1 10 Status branch 3 8 3 15 3 25 status indicators definitions 3 7 LEDs 3 4 3 6 straps See configuration options SubHS Sub Network Health and Status branch 3 8 3 53 3 54 synchronous operation 2 6 4 1 4 10 Index 6 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Index Talk Data branch 3 8 3 62 3 64 telephone external 3 62
10. Command Sent A command is sent to a remote modem No Rem Response or Remote Modem Fail A remote modem does not respond to a command within 5 seconds Command Complete A command issued to a local or remote modem is completed Invalid Command The modem cannot complete a command 3 12 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Messages listed in Table 3 5 are dial access security messages Table 3 5 Dial Access Security Messages Dial Access Security Message Indicates Get VF PsWd The answering modem is waiting for the originating caller to transmit a VF password Get DTE PsWd The answering modem is waiting to receive a valid DTE password from the remote DTE VF PsWd Timeout The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the allowed time limit was exceeded before the modem received a VF password from the originating dialer Unknown DTEpswd The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the DTE passwords received from the remote DTE were invalid No Orig PsWd The modem did not attempt to establish a call as requested because the AT dial command did not contain an originate access password Unknown VF PsWd The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected because the modem received an invalid VF password DTEpswd Timeout The modem did not finish answering a call disconnected becaus
11. In a multipoint network several different data rates from tributary modems transmitters communicating with one control modem This protocol Microcom Networking Protocol detects and corrects data errors caused by telephone line noise and signal distortion MNPS5 includes data compression Modulator DEModulator A device that transforms signals from digital to analog form and vice versa The process of varying some characteristics usually amplitude frequency and or phase of a carrier wave to form data transmissions A device that enables the simultaneous transmission of multiple independent data streams into a single high speed data stream A circuit connecting one control modem with one or more tributary modems A communications circuit The customer assigned diagnostic address of a modem Network Interface Module The interface provided up to two per carrier for the public switched telephone network PSTN VF line distortion which is usually associated with pulse code modulation PCM compandor noise on the phone line 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 GL 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems NMS off hook on hook Originate mode parity PBX permissive interface phase jitter physical address point to point line poll list power up self test product code protocol PSTN Quick Configuration display Network Management System set of diagnostic and configuration management t
12. Leased Transmit Level Selects the modem s transmit power level over leased lines The transmit output level can be selected 1 dBm decrements from 0 dBm to 15 dBm NOTE The leased TX level is limited to 1 dBm in all countries except North America The AT command is S Register S45 n where n is from 0 to 15 corresponding to 0 dBm to 15 dBm Auto Dial Back Disable Nxt Disable Enable FastBackup This configuration option is not available if the LeaseLine Rate is configured for TMp and the NetworkPosition is configured for Control Automatic Dial Backup Allows the modem to dial the number stored in directory location 1 to restore communications with the remote modem when the leased lines fail NOTE In point to point applications this configuration option must be set to Enable in both the local and remote modem The answering modem must have its Auto Answer Ring Number configuration option enabled Refer to the Line Dialer configuration option group for information regarding Auto Answer NOTE When this configuration option is enabled the originating modem will attempt the dial backup for a maximum of 10 call attempts with a 2 minute delay between calls This function can be reset with a completed manual dial backup a power cycle or using NMS m Fast Backup Only used in special applications requiring a shortened delay time from the failure of the leased lines to the initiation of the automatic dial backup The AT co
13. amp T2 Pattern Transmits and receives a 511 Bit Error Rate Test Tests BERT amp T3 Local Digital Loopback test amp T4 Enables Receive Remote Loopback Response configuration option amp T5 Disables Receive Remote Loopback Response configuration option amp T6 Remote Digital Loopback test amp 7 Remote Digital Loopback with Pattern amp T8 Local Loopback with Pattern amp T9 Self Test 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 5 11 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 3 6 of 8 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence amp Vn View Configuration Options Displays each configuration group within the None Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 and Customer 2 configuration areas as well as the telephone numbers stores in directory locations 1 24 amp VO Active Operating configuration options amp V1 Active Saved configuration options amp V2 Customer 1 configuration options amp V3 Customer 2 configuration options amp V4 Directory locations 1 24 amp Wn Write Save to Memory Saves the current configuration options in Configure Save Active Operating to one of three configuration areas amp WO Saved to Active Save amp W1 Saved to Customer 1 amp W2 Saved to Customer 2 amp Xn Transmit Clock Source Configure Edit amp X0 Internal Modem provides transmit clock source for DTE Interface synchronous data Pin 15 amp X
14. then S56 1 and 2 57 Remote Access Password Register allows entry of the second pair of Configure Edit digits of a remote access password Any value from 00 to 99 is valid Misc S58 Remote Access Password Register allows entry of the third pair of Configure Edit digits of a remote access password Any value from 00 to 99 is valid Misc 559 Remote Access Password Register allows entry of the fourth pair Configure WEdit rightmost of digits of a remote access password Any value from 00 Misc to 99 is valid 5 20 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 4 7 of 13 391x Series S Registers S Register Description DCP LCD Command Sequence S61 CT111 Rate Control Register determines if CT111 Rate is disabled set for Fallback 1 or Fallback 2 CT111 Rate allows the DTE to control modem rate via Pin 23 of the EIA 232 D interface This configuration option determines the effect of the DTE Rate Control signal It is only valid in Async Direct mode and Synchronous mode For proper operation disable the V 32bis Autorate and V 32bis Automode configuration options Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Fallback 2 Fallback 2 The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit DTE Interface S62 V 25bis Coding Register identifies to the modem the type of coding used by the DTE while in V 25bis mode Register has the following values 0 ASCII 1 EBCDIC The
15. 2 Call Connect Only 3 Call Progress Only The factory setting is Call Connect amp Progress Configure WEdit Misc 567 Directory Location 1 Callback Register determines if the modem uses the single number callback function Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Misc S69 Make Busy Via DTR Register determines if the modem goes off hook busy when DTR is OFF Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Line Dialer 70 V 27bis Train Register controls the train time for V 27bis operation Register has the following values 0 Short 1 Long The factory setting is Short Configure Edit Leased Line S71 XTXC Clamps TXC Register allows the modem s TXC output to be clamped off when TX Clock Source is configured for External Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable Configure Edit DTE Interface 5 22 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 4 9 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S72 RTS Antistreaming Register determines the antistreaming operation Configure Edit of the modem DTE Interface Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 10sec 2 30
16. A or key 3 14 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Status Branch The Status branch of the Top Level menu allows you to view the current status of the leased line or dial connection the identity for example serial number and model number of your equipment and the DTE interface picis M DTE Backup Options Record Major SigQual Sent LSD Line Pri 4W APL Display Minor RevLevel 2 Modi DTR Line Pri 2W APL Clear Status Sig Noise FRev DSR Line Bkup 2W APL Dial NrEchLv HPH Tst Thresh FarEchLv FPt TXD eR eine Security FarEchDel RXD Novy Porti EchoFreqOff RTS NonLnearDist CTS Retrains 1 These parameters appear for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations These parameters appear for Trellis Multipoint modulation To access Status from the Top Level menu select Status Leased 19 2 a A Status Configure A Em RESE gt 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 15 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Device Health and Status DeviceHS DeviceHS provides a snapshot of current modem alarms which are active at the time the DeviceHS function is selected To access DeviceHS from the Status branch make the following selection Status gt A fae VF A 5 c Select DeviceHS Device HS gt SS Minor A L8 8 If alarms present press the appropriate func
17. A common bus at the rear of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier connecting each circuit card slot to the SDCP and or SDU It also distributes low voltage ac power to each slot A unit of signaling speed that is equal to the number of symbols per second This is not necessarily the same as bits per second although the terms are frequently interchanged Binary Synchronous Communications An IBM communications protocol that has become an industry standard It uses a defined set of control characters and control character sequences for synchronized transmission of binary coded data between stations in a data communications system A contraction of binary digit A bit which is the smallest unit of information represents the choice between a one or a zero sometimes called mark or space Bits per second Indicates the speed at which bits are transmitted across a data connection A method of transmission The simultaneous transmission to two or more communicating devices A storage device used to compensate for differences in the data flow rate when transmitting data from one device to another A sequence of successive bits usually eight handled as a unit in data transmission The rack mounting that contains 17 slots 1 control slot for an SDU and 16 modem slots See data carrier A modem that is designed for installation in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier and used at central site operations November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30
18. Delayed Call eg ono prete erret Bot suede etna e D 3 Call A swer Commands 2s eie on D 3 Incoming Call ecce ee ERR e errem Reo he ERR ehe D 3 Disregard Incoming Call DIC serere mee hys D 3 Connect Incoming Call CIC rsrs dre ada erheben eee D 4 Program Normal ss esga ce BUR gang D 4 Request List of Delayed Numbers RED D 4 Request List of Forbidden Numbers RLF 0 2c e eee eeees D 4 Request List of Stored Numbers RLN certe tRRR Res D 5 List Delayed Numbers Response LSD seses nds ces ines eR Rm D 5 List Forbiddent Numbers Response LSF D 5 List Stored Number Response LSN D 5 Command Response occ ck sg hs pt eR RUD e rb IRR COP RES D 6 VOTE CAE vue D 6 Tnsslid a sepa d ak de RE D 6 Overview This appendix describes V 25bis dialing commands and responses CCITT V 25bis is an international dialing protocol that permits direct and stored number dialing using DTEs in either Asynchronous Bisynchronous or HDLC operating mode The 391x Series modems support V 25bis request and answer commands As commands are entered from the DTE the 391x Series modems issue a response to the DTE which indicates if the call failed or connected or if the command is valid or invalid The following sections discuss those V 25bis commands supported by the 391x S
19. Directory Status displays the status of each directory location To access Directory Status from the Call Setup branch make the following selections E Setup lt A Directory Status A G 2 8 Press the key until Directory Status appears Press any function key to select Directory Status 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 61 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Number Status A 01 Allowed CAD lt Em e nj gt Select Nxt to display other directory locations The status of a directory location can be No Number The directory location is empty Allowed The number in this directory location may be dialed at this time Delayed The number in this directory location may be dialed later Forbidden The number in this directory location may not be dialed Delayed and Forbidden only appear in certain countries When a number is delayed press the gt key to display the value of the delay in minutes The delayed and forbidden conditions can be cleared by power cycling the modem This is actually the only way to reenable a forbidden number Deleting a number from a directory location and reentering it into another directory location will not change the delayed or forbidden condition of this number Talk Data Branch The Talk Data function is not available in TMp Control mode The Talk Data branch of the Top Level menu allows you to switch the modem between Talk mode a
20. Disable makes a configuration option unavailable for use NOTE In some countries the range of allowable values of some configuration options is restricted The modem will accept any selection but it will set the configuration option to the closest legal value The actual value that is accepted by the modem is displayed when the F2 key is pressed to enter a selection The DTE Interface configuration options contain EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 and asynchronous character format information essential for maintaining a connection and for transmitting data between the DTE and the modem Table 4 1 shows each DTE Interface configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 1 1 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options Async Sync Mode Sync Nxt Sync Async Asynchronous Synchronous Mode Determines whether the modem operates in Asynchronous mode or Synchronous mode If the AT command set is enabled and this configuration option is set to Sync then the modem operates in Async mode when offline For Async Dial Async Leased and UNIX D
21. Modem Installation OVERVIEW eR Ra Re EP e RACE RR RUNS 2 1 39x Seres Modem PACEABe oe eta dee ten phon ee 2 1 Customer Supplied Equipment eee 2 2 Model 3910 Modem Installation sues RR Ree 2 2 Connecting Cables to the Model 3910 Modems 2 3 DLE COMMECHON 1er tee Ste dE breed cipe erue ade vs 2 4 Model 3910 4 Wire 2 Wire Leased Line Connection 2 4 Dial Network Connection ss seris ee eeu ec temm ck lichen 2 4 Model 5910 Dial Backup ConnecuOn cucecrr rester aoe ernie 2 4 Model 3910 Leased Backup Connection 2 4 Network Management System Connection 2 5 Power Supply Connection 1s ey eher ere etm erm e dere erroe 2 5 Modem PowerUp l e eR das Ie kee eee GLAS C RIPE 2 5 Selecting Factory Configuration Options 2 6 Using the Diagnostic Control Panel DCP 2 6 Using AT Commands 4 rete Me euis E RE ER UMOR 2 7 Removing and Replacing Model 3910 Modems 2 9 Model 3911 Modem msalani sss 2 9 Removing and Replacing Model 3911 Modems 2 12 Overview This chapter provides a list of equipment supplied with the modem as well as a list of customer supplied equipment In addition it describes how to install and remove the 391x Series modem and how to select a factory preset configuration using either the
22. eem nete 3 7 Other Dele oer rte OR RR 3 7 Keypad tee emn em RRE ER REESE UR Ee 3 7 Menu Structure ss ics seio e ee RR eer EE Sa E a 3 8 Top Level Menu Status and Operational Messages 3 9 Quick Configuration Display eR tee Saale ed ole RR 3 14 Status Branch 5 css resti ee die dad s ROC RR ede R CEPS 3 15 Device Health and Status DeviceHS 3 16 cen dicts dart t eehrUbberig es d deeds Pads id Gade Rode 3 19 IdeBUty eis ded bc edges pene besa date 3 20 DIB ware arg te 3 21 Backup uselrrerkee Ree Rene RR Mee Re S 3 21 CODBOIS 3 23 l n MET Cr 3 24 Conlsute Brano aee ricca er aciei ees acer dere c 3 25 Poll List Branch ue Rb ikes RESE rk 3 25 Dp dp EE 3 26 3 EE 3 27 CHANGE elm eh eras eee See ERR abet He ee pee ORES 3 27 PU dense ime E mete Es e iL rd i Cote See 3 28 DOO M MC Em 3 29 Control Branch cesse RR rris tinia ERREK ROKR HES E EAD 3 30 SDBAEST es coeurs Mere 3 31 coo ERR 3 31 Data SEAM cessere teens or bk e E HUS ele SIR GIG 3 32 BLA LEDS teen eei eMe EORR ed 3 33 Make Busy Remove Make Busy 3 34 Service Line Disconnect Service Line sco ce aang adden ess 3 35 Download Software iid hae
23. negotiating handshaking sequence by sending this character The modems will connect in Buffer mode no error control Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs When the modem receives this fallback character it switches to Buffer mode and transmits an EC fallback character to the DTE When comparing incoming characters for a match against the EC fallback character the modem ignores parity The AT command is An where n is a value from 0 to 127 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 41 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 6 4 of 8 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Flw Cntl of DTE CTS to DTE Nxt CTS to DTE Disable XON XOFF This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Flow Control of DTE Determines how the modem controls the flow of data from the DTE m CTStoDTE Method of flow control in which the modem raises and lowers its CTS interface lead to indicate when the DTE should start and stop sending data m Disable The modem cannot control the flow of data from the DTE m XON XOFF Method of flow control in which the modem sends XON and XOFF characters to the DTE to start and stop the flow of data The AT commands for Disable are Q0 Q5 Q6 The AT commands for XON XOFF are Q1 and Q4 The AT commands for CTS to DTE are Q2 and Q3 Flw Cntl of RTS to Mdm Nxt RTS to Mdm
24. press the 2 key Rem Digital Loop This test is not available when using TMp modulation or Remote mode Rem Digital Loop performs a remote digital loopback CCITT V 54 Loop 2 Figure 3 5 This test can verify the integrity of the local modem the communication link and the remote modem Any data or pattern entered at the local DTE is sent to and returned from the remote modem For this test to operate properly the modems must be operating at the same rate and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode SENDS TEST MESSAGE E TRANSMITTER al RECEIVER DTE DTE INTERFACE NETWORK RECEIVER TRANSMITTER ind pex TEST LOCAL MODEM REMOTE MODEM ib DTE INTERFACE MESSAGE Figure 3 5 Remote Digital Loopback 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 49 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To access Rem Digital Loop from the Test branch make the following selections Test A A 8 8 Press the key until Rem Digital Loop appears Press any function key to start this test Test Remote Loop A Started A lt a re 8 gt The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED lights for the duration of the test If Invalid Command appears on the LCD another test is in progress Select Abort to clear the current test and try again If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of
25. to 10 This example demonstrates VF threshold editing and saving With the exception of Signal Quality all VF thresholds may be modified in this manner Signal Quality uses a menu selection with possible values of Excelent Excellent Good Fair Poor or No Signal Editing and saving a VF threshold is similar to editing and saving a configuration option For another example of editing and saving refer to the Editing and Saving a Configuration Option section in Chapter 4 3 42 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation RSL High dBm CA t 09 a 9 In example shown above 09 is the upper High RSL threshold in dBm To change the 09 to 10 make the following selections Select the F2 f key to increment the number above the cursor 0 to 1 NOTE Note that a warning appears on the second line of the screen if you enter an invalid VF threshold out of range You will not be able to save your edits until all thresholds are within their valid range Refer to Table 3 8 for valid VF threshold ranges RSL High dBm xci lbs 19 D CAS 2 n e nj gt Press the key to move the cursor to the next position 9 Select the F2 key to change the number above the cursor 9 to 0 RSL High dBm A Nxt t10 A IOS NOTE If you want to modify additional VF t
26. 14 400 V 33 18 19 200 V 32 terbo 25 2400 TMp 4 34 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 5 3 of 6 Leased Line Configuration Options V32bis Autorate Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option only appears when Leased Line Rate is configured for V 32 terbo or V 32bis data rate V 32bis Autorate Once connected the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired When line conditions improve the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support This autorating only occurs between 19 200 bps and 4800 bps during V 32 V 32bis V 32 terbo connections The AT command is S Register S82 n where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable V32bis Override Disable Nxt Disable 2400 1200 This configuration option is ignored unless Leased Line Rate is 4800 V32b V 32bis Override Activates the Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 1200 bps or 2400 bps modulation Allows the modem to use a non standard point to point modulation capable of secondary channel diagnostics while running at 1200 bps or 2400 bps NOTE This configuration option must be the same in both the local and remote modems NOTE The 1200 selection bps is available only if the Proprietary 1200 device option is installed Leased Tx Level The factory default setting is country dependent It is 0 dBm in North America Nxt 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
27. 19 dual leased line operation See backup leased EIA LEDs 3 33 EIA 232 D cable connection 2 4 B 3 pin assignments C 2 status 3 4 3 6 3 21 end to end pattern test 3 52 environment 1 9 equipment customer supplied 2 2 list 2 1 2 2 H 1 return 1 6 error control 4 39 escape character 4 21 5 2 5 15 faceplate 1 4 3 3 factory default configurations 2 6 2 8 4 1 F 2 F 7 features 1 1 1 2 firmware part number FPt 3 20 firmware revision level FRev 3 20 firmware upgrades download 3 35 3 42 flow control 4 42 4 43 front panel See diagnostic control panel function keys 3 6 3 8 4 8 government requirements Canada 1 7 United States 1 5 1 6 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 Index 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems handshaking sequence 3 63 3 64 hang up 3 56 3 57 hardware part number HPt 3 20 HDLC 4 20 D 1 Health and Status definitions 3 23 3 24 Identity 3 20 indicators definitions 3 7 status LEDs 3 4 3 6 installation Model 3910 2 2 2 12 Model 3911 2 9 2 11 keypad 3 7 3 8 LCD liquid crystal display description 3 2 3 6 3 7 menu structure 3 8 messages 3 9 3 14 3 23 3 24 leased backup operation See backup leased Leased Line configuration options group 4 33 4 38 leased line connection 2 4 leased line operation 4 33 4 38 B 2 LEDs status indicators 3 4 3 6 line connection dial 2 4 leased 2 4 Line Dialer configuration op
28. 1996 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems 3 DCP Operation OVEIVIEW Diagnostic Control Panels Status Indicators sso Diagnostic Control Panel Operation Menu Stricture 5 e rel euas Status Branch collo Its Configure Branch Poll East Branch essc Control Test Branch 22x m RR Call Setup Branch scie wa sae es Talk Data Branch 2 2 br Security Brame Remote Brameh RE eR 4 DCP Configuration CVETO Cue cies Ip tate opos Ba Configure Branch esee Configuration Tables 5 AT Command Set and S Registers OVetVIeW oos s e e es Operating Modes Command Guidelines AT Command List S Register LIS ooh die ES 6 Dial Access Security OVCTIVICW MED Security Branch seee ewe tenes Security Configuration Options Security Password Entry Techniques Database Table Examples November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Table of Contents Appendices Glossary Index rommounw DCMU IOS oaea ont Mach dees SEES 1 ur crLe emrRQEterte9eprRe 9 te ese es B 1 Pin SSISMMICINS e er PLUR ESTO YS C 1 CCITT V 25bis Dialing Commands and Response D 1 ASCU Character Table cbr LOTES E IR EROS E 1 Default Configuration Options F 1 Samp
29. 2 Nxt 100000000 CA 2 fre rs gt Select Nxt until RemAccssPasswrd appears RemAccssPasswrd A Nxt 110000000 fess e Select the F2 key to increment password values RemAccssPasswrd A ie 10000000 A L Jj J Press the gt key to move the cursor to the next position RemAccssPasswrd A 112345678 Aa mj Continue this sequence until you have entered the new password value November 1996 4 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Summary To save the new password to a configuration area make the following selections RemAccssPasswrd A Nxt t12345678 Press the A key to scroll up twice Choose Function ZN Edit Save gt B Select Save Sav EditArea to gt A uns cB Select configuration area Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 to save changes Select the 2 key to exit to the Top Level menu or select the A key to remain in the Configure branch When using the DCP to edit configuration options keep the following in mind Nxt has two functions First it indicates that more configuration options are available within that group These are accessed by selecting Nxt pressing F1 and scrolling down to the next configuration option Second it indicates that what is displa
30. 3 Cable 3 19200 V32t 19200 V32t TX TX DTE Leased DTE Sync 3910 A SN 3910 B Sync Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 Figure G 3 Sample Configuration Point to Point with Automatic Dial Backup Configuration Options 3910 Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exception Auto Dial Back Set to Enable 3910 B Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options with the following exception Auto Dial Back Set to Enable Cables Cable 1 Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTEI Cable 2 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Cable 3 Use part number 125 0067 0031 a 6 position 4 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DIAL G 4 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Sample Configuration Point to Point with Network Management Figure G 4 shows a sample configuration for point to point applications with network management 19200 V32t 19200 V32t TX TX DTE Leased DTE 3910 Sync NMS y 3910 Sync Cable 1 3600 Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 300 cc Hubbing IN Device x Cable 4 or 6800 o Ad
31. 32 terbo 19200 16800 bps CCITT V 32bis 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 bps CCITT V 32 9600 4800 bps Paradyne Trellis Multipoint 19200 14400 9600 7200 4800 2400 bps CCITT V 22bis 2400 bps CCITT V 27bis 4800 2400 bps CCITT V 33 14400 12000 bps CCITT V 29 9600 7200 4800 bps Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 1200 2400 bps Dial Line Modulations Paradyne V 32 terbo 19200 16800 bps CCITT V 32bis 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 bps CCITT V 32 9600 4800 bps CCITT V 22bis 2400 bps CCITT V 22 1200 bps CCITT V 23 1200 600 bps CCITT V 21 300 bps Bell 212A 1200 bps Bell 103J 300 bps Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 1200 2400 bps 1 8 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Introduction Table 1 1 2 of 3 Technical Specifications for 391x Series Modems Specifications Description ENVIRONMENT Operating Temperature Relative Humidity Shock and Vibration Storage Temperature 32 F 0 C to 122 F 50 5 to 90 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping 4 F 20 C to 158 F 70 C DTE INTERFACE 25 pin D subminiature connector EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 MODEL 3910 POWER SUPPLY AC POWER REQUIREMENTS 100 to 250 Vac 50 to 60 Hz POWER CONSUMPTION Model 3910 6 watts typical including power supply speaker off Model 3911 4 watts typical each card Speaker consumption is approximately 1 watt at high volume DIMENSION
32. 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 G 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Point to Point Figure G 1 shows a sample configuration for point to point applications 19200 V32t gt DTE Sync Cable 1 Cable 2 Leased 3910 T oC 19200 V32t TX 3910 B Cable 2 DTE Sync Cable 1 Figure G 1 Sample Configuration Point to Point Configuration Options 3910A Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options 3910 B Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options Cables Cable 1 Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTEI Cable 2 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED G 2 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Sample Configuration Multipoint Figure G 2 shows a sample configuration for multipoint applications TMp control modems can accept mixed inbound rates from tributary modems For example one inbound link may be configured for 14 4 kbps while another link experiencing line impairments may be configured for 9 6 kbps The following control tributary rate combinations are allowed control at 19 2 kbps tributaries at 14 4 or 9 6 kbps control at 14 4 kbps tributaries at 14 4 or 9 6 kbp
33. A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key EIA LEDs Use the EIA LEDs function to change the port that controls the front panel LEDs This function allows the front panel EIA LEDs to display the activity of a selected digital interface To access LEDs from the Control branch make the following selections Control Lt aN EIA_LEDs A 2 Em e 8 gt Press the gt key until EIA LEDs appears Select EIA LEDs EIA LED xxxxx CA A M Press the F1 key until the appropriate digital interface appears The xxxxx field displays the currently selected interface The valid interfaces are Portl and depending on the configuration option either CC NMS Control Channel or DC Diagnostic Channel Refer to the section Miscellaneous Configuration Options Diag Connection in Chapter 4 Select the appropriate interface by pressing the corresponding function key EIA LED xxxxx aX E ae A L8 8 After selecting the desired interface the message Command Complete appears on the bottom line of the LCD and the selected interface appears in the xxxxx field To exit this function and remain in the Control branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key NOTE The Port1 interface is the only display allowed on the 3911 modem therefore the entire EIA LEDs branch
34. Answer or Originate mode If TMp is selected you must choose either Control or Trib Tributary mode 3 Press the gt key until the appropriate factory preset template appears on the LCD and press the corresponding function key to select your choice For certain factory templates you will also need to choose the appropriate mode 4 Choose Function appears and displays the Edit and Save functions 5 Press the F3 key Save to save the new factory preset configuration to one of three configuration areas Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 These three configuration areas are nonvolatile memory locations Active Saved contains the most recently saved changes to any configuration options In the event of power loss the modem retrieves these configuration options Customer 1 and Customer 2 are user defined configuration areas The LCD now displays Sav EditArea to 2 6 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Modem Installation 6 Press the key until the appropriate configuration area appears on the LCD then press the corresponding function key to select your choice Saving configuration options to the Active Saved configuration area automatically saves them to the Active Operating configuration area The LCD displays Command Complete 7 The modem is now configured with the selected factory template Press 2 key to return to the Top Level menu Refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration for more information
35. Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 4800 TMp IX DTE 3910 C Sync Cable 2 Cable 1 Figure G 6 Sample Configuration Extended Multipoint 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 G 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Configuration Options Cables 3920 A 3920 B 3910 A 3910 B 3910 C Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 5 Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exception Rate at 19 2K Set ports 1 2 3 and 4 to 4800 Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Set to RXC Loop Rate at 19 2K Set ports 1 2 3 and 4 to 4800 Port TXC Source Set port 4 to External Use TMp Control default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Set to External LeasedLine Rate Set to 4800 TMp Use TMp Trib default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Setto RXC Loop LeasedLine Rate Set to 4800 TMp Use TMp Trib default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Set to RXC Loop LeasedLine Rate Set to 4800 TMp Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTE1 2 3 or 4 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Use part
36. DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Result Codes Result codes are informational messages such as Connect and Ring sent from the modem and displayed on the asynchronous DTE terminal For a list of Result Codes refer to Table 5 1 in Chapter 5 AT Commands and S Registers m Enable Modem sends result codes to the DTE m Disable Modem does not send result codes to the DTE m Enable in Originate For UNIX applications enable result codes only on the originating modem This prevents the DTE on the answer side from interpreting result codes as login attempts The AT command for Enable is QO The AT command for Disable is Q1 The AT command for Enable in Originate mode is Q2 4 22 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 2 4 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options ExtendResltCode Enable Nxt Enable Disable Add EC Add V42 MNP Use DTE Rate This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Extended Result Codes Informational messages such as VF data rate and Error Control are displayed with the result codes For a list of Extended Result Codes refer to Table 5 1 in Chapter 5 AT Commands and S Registers m Enable NO DIALTONE BUSY NO ANSWER and CONNECT xxxx xxxx VF data rate appear along with result codes listed in Table 5 1 in Chapter 5 Disable Only OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER and ERROR result codes appear Add EC Places the EC suffix after the
37. Dialing When the Remote Modem is Configured for e ex Re Rub Rc ek quen Manual Dialing When the Remote Modem is Configured for Answer io OE e a RE E esate SCOND sisia edet ae ped en be ed cn rhe PCI reda Remate BEAN qd Ee Pts ares ete RERUM ERR Diagnostic Control Panel ACCESS deett REY ees 3 65 3 69 This chapter describes how to use the diagnostic control panel DCP of the 391x Series modem It also describes how to select and use each branch of the Top Level menu tree Diagnostic Control Panels There are two types of diagnostic control panels DCP the DCP on the standalone Model 3910 modems and the shared diagnostic control panel SDCP an optional feature used with the Model 3911 installed into a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Both DCPs have a two line 32 character liquid crystal display LCD and keypad through which Top Level menu branches are accessed to perform the following Check modem status Set up configuration options Initiate diagnostic tests Initiate and disconnect dial operations Access remote modems through the local modem s DCP The LCD displays the result of any command initiated using the DCP Most of these operations can be performed from an attached asynchronous DTE using the AT command set 3 2 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Model 3910 Diagnostic Control Panel The diagnostic cont
38. EC Enable Enable Busy Tone X6 Add V42 MNP Enable Enable Detect X7 Use DTE Rate Enable Enable Configure Edit Line Dialer Extended Result Code Enable Displays all result codes listed in Table 5 1 except for error control suffix Disable Only displays OK CONNECT RING NO CARRIER ERROR Add EC Displays result codes with EC suffix Add V42 MNP_ Displays result codes with V 42 or MNP suffix Use DTE Rate Displays DTE data rate instead of line rate Dial Tone Detect Enable Sets the modem for dial tone detect Disable Sets the modem for blind dialing NOTE It may not be possible to disable Dial Tone Detect in some countries Busy Tone Detect Enable Modem monitors for busy tone Disable Modem ignores busy tone Yn Long Space Disconnect Configure Edit YO Disable Ignores long space Hine Dialer Y1 Enable Disconnects if long space is detected Enables transmission of a long space 5 8 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 AT Command Set and S Registers DTR drops on the DTE interface This can be used on the answer side modem to force the originate modem to initiate a dial backup NOTE Only the Standard RS232 setting is allowed in Austria Table 5 3 3 of 8 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence Zn Reset and Load Active Control Reset ZO Loads configuration options from Active Saved to Active Operating Z1 Loads configuration options from Customer 1 to Ac
39. Es nen se Abort Self Loc Analog Loop Rem Digital Loop Loc Digital Loop Pattern To access the Test branch from the Top Level menu make the following selections Leased 19 2 Control Test Sahm Press gt key until Test appears Select Test Abort Abort ends any test that is in progress and brings the modem back to the normal mode of operation Confirmation is provided by the Command Complete message 3 46 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation To access Abort from the Test branch make the following selection Test gt A Kee Self A lt Em e 8 Select Abort Test Abort A Command 55 A lt a fre gt The modem stops all tests currently in progress and displays the Command Complete status message on the LCD To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Self Self performs an internal self test of the modem which takes less than a minute to complete The modem must be offline otherwise Invalid Command appears WARNING When this test is run in Remote mode it will cause the Remote mode session to be lost The Remote mode session can be reestablished after the self test is complete usually one or two minutes If the remote self test fails there will be a Device Failure alarm message when the remote mod
40. Glossary CCITT CCITT 22 CCITT V 22bis CCITT V 27bis CCITT V 29 CCITT V 32 CCITT V 32bis CCITT V 42 CCITT V 42bis CCITT V 54 channel character character echo circuit pack lock Command mode configuration area configuration option connector An advisory committee Consultative Committee on International Telephone and Telegraph established by the United Nations to recommend communications standards and policies A standard for modems operating full duplex over dial networks at 1200 bps A standard for modems operating full duplex over leased lines or dial networks at 2400 bps A standard for modems operating over leased lines at 2400 or 4800 bps A standard for modems operating over leased lines at 4800 7200 or 9600 bps A standard for modems operating full duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data over leased lines or dial networks at 4800 or 9600 bps A standard for modems operating full duplex with asynchronous or synchronous data over leased lines or dial networks at 4800 7200 9600 12000 or 14400 bps CCITT standard for error control protocol CCITT standard for data compression CCITT standard for local and remote diagnostic loopback tests A path for electrical transmission between two or more points Also called a circuit line link path or facility A letter figure number punctuation or other symbol A way to check the accuracy of data transmission by se
41. Manual 3600 Hubbing Device Feature Number 3600 F3 300 Installation Instructions COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Models 3910 and 3911 Installation Instructions Call your sales representative to order additional product documentation viii November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Overview Features Introduction dr 1 1 IB AUN PRINT HERE 1 1 Multipoint Applications eem m ro em d 1 2 Leased Backup Applications eeu Re bes ended ees 1 2 COMSPHERE 391x Series Models errore eres 1 2 Standalone Model 3910 4 Wire 2 Wire Modem 1 3 Carrier Mounted Model 3911 4 Wire 2 Wire Modem 1 4 Government Requirements and Equipment Return 1 5 WSS TAGES nrc 1 5 isis rne beac ead CERE EG CU Ea MEO EE E 1 7 Technical SpecttiCatiotis ceesti he BIER C Rer TRIP ED ER Ee rx eds 1 8 The COMSPHERE 391x Series modems a new generation of full feature high speed modems offer reliable asynchronous and synchronous operation over leased line or dial networks The 391x Series modems unique software defineability allows for the addition of future enhancements whether it is installing new features or firmware upgrades The modem s compatibility with a number of dialing methods and protocols such as asynchronous AT commands CCITT V 25bis dialing and the user friendly diagnostic control panel DCP permits the 391x Series modem to be use
42. NETWORK The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets certain telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of connection In some cases the company s inside wiring associated with a single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified connector assembly telephone extension cord The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian maintenance facility designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone line and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such co
43. November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation menu tree branches are discussed later in Chapter 3 except for Configure which is discussed in Chapter 4 and Security which is discussed in Chapter 6 Functions that appear on the LCD vary depending upon the type of model installed its operating mode and software configuration Top Level Menu Status and Operational Messages Access to all menu tree branches from the DCP begins at the Top Level menu the head of the menu hierarchy The LCD s top line identifies the modem status as listed in Table 3 3 while the bottom line displays the main menu tree branches as well as operational and security messages as listed in Table 3 4 and Table 3 5 Table 3 3 1 of 4 Top Level Menu Status Status Message Indicates Normal Leased MR The modem is operating on leased lines and transmitting at the Operation displayed data rate Idle MH The modem is configured for dial network operation and is on hook OnLine MR The modem is online in Data mode and operating at the displayed EC data rate EC error control appears if error control is operational Ring Indicate The local modem is receiving an incoming ring Test MR The modem is in test mode operating at the displayed data rate Alarm Make Busy The modem is in a Make Busy condition Power On Fail The modem has failed its Power On Self test SelfHealth Fail A failure has occurred in the modem s ha
44. Remote mode Reset Security lt Dial Test Backup only Dial Answer A Change Directory Disconnect Dial Standby A Directory Status or Does not appear Return to Dial in North America Directory Locations 1 24 Self Rem Digital Loop Pattern Abort Loc Analog Loop Loc Digital Loop A Set Access Ctrl Admin Password 3910 3911 only only EditPassWdTable Reset Make Busy Download Code or DownloadSoftware Set Answer Sec Speaker Data Stream RemoveMakeBusy EIA LEDS Service Line VF Thresh Update DiscServLine from previous page lt V42 MNP Buffer E e Test M Misc M Security M Err Contrl Mode DTE RL CT140 StrapsWhenDisc EntryWait Time V42bis Compress DTE LL CT141 Speaker Control VF_Prompt_Type MNP5 Compress Test Timeout Speaker Volume DTE_PW_Tries EC Negotiat Bfr Rev Remote Loop Access frm Remt DTE_PW_TermChar EC Fallbck Char V54 Address RemAccssPasswrd DTE_PW_BkSpChar Fiw Cnt of DTE V54 Device Type Dir Callback Get User ID Flw Cntl of NMS Call Msgs NMS Reporting XON XOFF Psthru NetworkPosition Answ Secur Mode Mdm Mdm FlowCtl NetMngmtAddress Originate Secur Break Buffr Ctl Send Break Ontl BuffrDiscDelay Max Frame Size CellularEnhance RdcdAsyncBufSiz Diag Connection Link Delay sec Set_Orig_Secur Set_Admin_PsWd Does not appear in TMp Control mode Does not appear in Remote mode Self Loc_Digital_Loop and Pattern appear if the secondar
45. Roan Oe ee ake Gy ERE 3 35 Selec ne Clone Retmole lt s ere repe pone nere weer bead 3 36 Clone Remote in Point to Point Configurations 3 36 Clone Remote in Broadcast Configurations 3 37 Clone Remote in Multipoint Configurations 3 38 Implementing a Clone Remote Operation 3 40 VF Thresholds Update cse cate Re mex xo 3 42 Hic rc D C 3 46 MM EP DEP 3 46 Sell es Rd Xd dE 3 47 Loc Anglos Loops tecto i hcm bct EA E EES 3 48 Reni Dipital LOOD 3 asana a n 3 49 Loe Digital Loop che nisa e rea E n oto es 3 50 PANG dod tpa ea bust heh te EE a rode cn cas Qd 3 51 Sub Network Health and Status Branch 3 53 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Overview Call Setup Btanch esser RR RR Rex e peer Di l ve ade eue lutem PME CI ure pe 3 PORE INR UE AER EQUI LES REEF COMPRE Dual Staudby Retutnto Dial egere srie seca E th pes Change serre e debe dae Entering Telephone Numbers and Dial Command Modifiers into Directory Locations vecim simeoni qe ROGA S ERE ELSE Directory Status Does Not Appear in North America Talks Data Branoh 22d detect ahead pen om S Reus Manual
46. Series Modems Table 5 4 12 of 13 391x Series S Registers S Register Description DCP LCD Command Sequence S92 V 29 Train On Data When enabled the modem receiver can train based upon the incoming data or a training sequence from the distant modem This function is necessary for a remote tributary modem in a V 29 multipoint network and is recommended for a control modem as well Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Leased S93 V 29 Retrain When enabled the modem transmits a training sequence whenever it receives one This configuration option should normally be disabled for control modems Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable Configure Edit Leased 594 V29 Link Configuration Selects point to point multipoint operation Register has the following values 0 PointToPoint 1 Multipoint The factory setting is PointToPoint Configure Edit Leased 595 Trellis Multipoint TMp Train Time Defines the length of time energy is sent from the tributary modem to the control modem More severe line conditions require longer time selections Register has the following values 0 10 milliseconds 1 20 milliseconds 2 50 milliseconds 3 100 milliseconds 4 200 milliseconds 5 300 milliseconds The factory setting is O 10 milliseconds Con
47. Symptom Action The modem dials but does not connect If the modem is operating behind a PBX determine if a 9 and comma are needed before the telephone number Verify whether Tone or Pulse dialing is needed Verify that both modems are configured the same in regard to Error Control Try calling in Buffer mode If both modems use V 32bis or V 32 modulation try setting the modem s V 32bis Train configuration option to Long Intermittent disconnects high error rates or excessive retransmissions occur Perform an End to End test Refer to Pattern located in the Test Branch section of Chapter 3 The modem establishes and then disconnects the call You may have a poor VF connection Try dialing again The remote modem may have encountered an error control EC disconnect If the modems cannot negotiate EC then a disconnect occurs The remote modem may be in a forced Error Control mode disconnect if there is no error control Reconfigure your modem to V 42 MNP or Buffer and try again Check the LCD to determine the reason for the disconnect Perform a Local Analog Loopback test High error rates occur when running a local loopback or self test Incoming rings can cause data errors during a loopback test Abort the test disconnect the modular VF cord and restart the test Table B 6 Online Operation Symptom Action The data is scrambled Verify that the character format d
48. Table Table E 1 3 of 4 ASCII Characters Hexadecimal Decimal Control Key ASCII Value ASCII Value Character 3B 059 3C 060 3D 061 3E 062 gt 063 40 064 41 065 A 42 066 B 43 067 C 44 068 D 45 069 E 46 070 F 47 071 G 48 072 H 49 073 4A 074 J 4B 075 K 4C 076 L 4D 077 M 4E 078 N 4F 079 50 080 P 51 081 Q 52 082 R 53 083 S 54 084 T 55 085 U 56 086 V 57 087 W 58 088 X 59 089 Y 5A 090 Z 5B 091 5C 092 093 5E 094 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 E 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table E 1 4 of 4 ASCII Characters Hexadecimal Decimal Control Key ASCII Value ASCII Value Character 095 60 096 61 097 62 098 b 63 099 C 64 100 d 65 101 e 66 102 f 67 103 g 68 104 h 69 105 6A 106 j 6B 107 k 6 108 6D 109 m 6E 110 n 6F 111 70 112 71 113 q 72 114 r 73 115 S 74 116 t 75 117 76 118 77 119 w 78 120 X 79 121 y 7A 122 2 7 123 7 124 7D 125 7 126 7F 127 delete E 4 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Default Configuration Options ONENEN somre ta US RP e rts eg ig ee eae by os MORE ee F 1 Overview Table F 1 in this appendix lists all default co
49. Talk Data and Security branches do not appear Change Directory is the only function available under the Call Setup branch Local Analog Loop and Remote Digital Loop do not appear under the Test branch when using the secondary channel When using the primary channel the Test branch does not appear Poll List Display is the only function available under the PList branch Exit Remote replaces Remote on the local modem s LCD To return to local modem operation select ExitRem Any changes made to configuration options in the remote modem are saved The following conditions can cause Remote branch access to fail The local modem is not able to communicate with the remote modem because of a poor dial network or leased line connection or the remote modem is not a 3900 Series modem If this is the case the status message No Response appears on the LCD If a connection is established but the remote modem s Access from Remote configuration option is disabled then the status message Access Disabled appears on the LCD If a connection is established but the wrong password is stored the status message Password Invalid appears on the LCD This configuration option must be enabled by the remote user Refer to the Remote Access Password configuration option in Chapter 4 The Remote mode command displays Other Test Active if an Analog Loopback test is currently running 3 68 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Diagnostic
50. Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the display If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to the Test section in Chapter 4 To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Pattern can transmit and receive a 511 bit error rate test pattern It can also be used with a currently running local analog loopback or a remote digital loopback to simulate data passing through the modem You will need to start the local analog or remote digital loopback test before you start the pattern test For this test to operate properly the modems must be online and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode Figures 3 7 through 3 9 TRANSMITTER GENERATOR 511 PATTERN DTE INTERFACE NETWORK INTERFACE 511 PATTERN RECEIVER 491 13075a Figure 3 7 Pattern Test and Local Analog Loopback Test 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 51 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems RECEIVER TRANSMITTER 511 PATTERN DTE DTE INTERFACE NETWORK INTERFACE GENERATOR ERRD 511 PATTERN TEST TRANSMITTER RECEIVER PATTERN LOCAL MODEM REMOTE MODEM 491 13075b Figure 3 8 Pattern Test and Digital Loopback Test RECEIVER TRANSMITTER COMPARATOR GENERATOR 511 PATTERN 511 PATTEHN DTE NETWORK DTE INTERFACE INTF GENERATOR COMPARATOR
51. WARNING THIS EQUIPMENT HAS BEEN TESTED AND FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE LIMITS FOR A CLASS A DIGITAL DEVICE PURSUANT TO PART 15 OF THE FCC RULES THESE LIMITS ARE DESIGNED TO PROVIDE REASONABLE PROTECTION AGAINST HARMFUL INTERFERENCE WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS OPERATED IN A COMMERCIAL ENVIRONMENT THIS EQUIPMENT GENERATES USES AND CAN RADIATE RADIO FREQUENCY ENERGY AND IF NOT INSTALLED AND USED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL MAY CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE TO RADIO COMMUNICATIONS OPERATION OF THIS EQUIPMENT IN A RESIDENTIAL AREA IS LIKELY TO CAUSE HARMFUL INTERFERENCE IN WHICH CASE THE USER WILL BE REQUIRED TO CORRECT THE INTERFERENCE AT HIS OWN EXPENSE THE AUTHORITY TO OPERATE THIS EQUIPMENT IS CONDITIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS THAT NO MODIFICATIONS WILL BE MADE TO THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THE CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS ARE EXPRESSLY APPROVED BY PARADYNE WARNING TO USERS OF DIGITAL APPARATUS IN CANADA THE DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS A LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL APPARATUS SET OUT IN THE RADIO INTERFERENCE REGULATIONS OF THE CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS LE PRES NT APPAREIL NUM RIQUE N MET PAS DE BRUITS RADIO LECTRIQUES D PASSANT LES LIMITES APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS NUM RIQUES DE LA CLASSE A PRESCRITES DANS LE R GLEMENT SUR LE BROUILLAGE RADIO LECTRIQUE DICT PAR LE MINIST RE DES COMMUNICATIONS DU CANADA November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Table of Contents Preface Ob
52. amp T9 if using AT commands Perform a local analog loopback with a Pattern test If the modem consistently registers errors contact your service representative If the modem passes the above tests and a problem still exists then the problem is probably not with your modem 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 B 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table B 2 Leased Line Operation Symptom Action The modems do not train up on Verify that the correct cabling is used for your application Refer to leased lines Chapter 2 Modem Installation Verify that one modem is configured for Answer mode and the other is configured for Originate mode For TMp operation one modem must be configured as a control modem and the other as a tributary modem Verify that both modems are using the same modulation scheme Verify that both modems are configured for the appropriate leased line mode For example if you have a 4 wire leased line then the modems must be configured for 4 wire operation Table B 3 Dial Backup Operation Symptom Action The dial backup line is present Verify that the correct telephone number for the remote modem is but the modems cannot connect stored in directory location 1 Verify that both modems have the Auto Dial Backup configuration option set to Enable Refer to Leased Line in Chapter 4 Call the answering modem with a handset and verify that the modem s answer tone is transmitted
53. backup lines will not interrupt the data flow on the primary lines The configuration option settings must be the same at both ends NOTE In network applications where the modem is in backup mode and is connected to a modem other than the modem connected to the primary leased line enabling this configuration option can cause problems V 42 MNP Buffer V 42 MNP Buffer configuration options determine the type of error correction and flow control used by the modems and attached DTEs Some choices within this group may not appear depending upon how previous configuration options have been selected If the Async Sync Mode configuration option is set for synchronous operation refer to the DTE Interface configuration options group then the V 42 MNP Buffer group does not appear on the LCD Any changes made to configuration options within this group only take effect after a disconnect Table 4 6 shows each V 42 MNP Buffer configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Async Dial factory default setting shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix E 4 38 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 6 1 of 8 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Err Contrl Mode V42 MNPorBfr Nxt V42 MNPorBfr V42 MNPorDsc MNP or Buffr MNP or Disc
54. before the data currently in the buffer This is also known as Expedited mode NOTE This configuration option is ignored if the Break Forces Escape configuration option refer to the DTE Dialer configuration options group is enabled The AT commands for Break First are VO K1 2 and K3 The AT commands for Data First are K4 and K5 4 44 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 6 7 of 8 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options BuffrDiscDelay 10sec Nxt 10sec Disable 60sec This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Buffer Disconnect Delay Determines how long the modem continues to transmit data stored in its buffers when the modem is commanded to disconnect by a locally attached DTE This also applies to the modem s receiving buffers when it is commanded to disconnect from a remote modem or DTE m Disable Modem disconnects immediately without attempting to send data stored in its buffers m 10 60 sec Maximum amount of time the modem tries to empty its buffers before disconnecting In both cases 10 sec and 60 sec the modem disconnects much sooner if it can empty its buffers NOTE This configuration option is not available if Error Control Mode configuration option is set to Direct Mode The AT command is S Register S49 n where n is 0 for Disable and any value from 1 to 255 in 1 secon
55. connection As a result Return_to_Dial appears on the LCD instead of Dial Standby Call Setup ZN NEM L8 L8 If the primary leased line is unacceptable select Return to Dial which switches the modem back to backup network operation LCD displays Dial Standby If however the primary leased line is operating properly select Disconnect from the Call Setup branch to drop the dial backup connection Also if the primary leased line operation is maintained uninterrupted for the amount of time specified in the Dial Standby configuration option the dial backup network disconnects To access Dial Standby or Return to Dial from the Call Setup branch make the following selections Call Setup A Dial Standby lt a re 8 Press the key until Dial Standby or Return to Dial appears Select the appropriate function 3 58 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Dial Standby A MI A L8 le L8 C9 If the modem is operating in a Dial Backup mode the Dial Standby function forces the modem to primary leased lines and the LCD displays the status message Command Complete Once the modem is in Dial Standby mode Return to Dial appears on the LCD Selecting this function forces the modem to the backup network and the LCD displays the status message Command Complete Change Directory Change Directory allows you to enter or modify t
56. detection enable or blind dialing disable m Enable Modem disconnects the call if a dial tone is not detected within 10 seconds and displays No Dial Tone on both the LCD and asynchronous DTE terminal m Disable Modem dials a call whether or not it detects a dial tone on the line This is known as blind dialing The period of time the modem waits before dialing is specified in the Blind Dial Pause configuration option NOTE It may not be possible to disable Dial Tone Detect in some countries The AT commands for Disable are X1 and X3 The AT commands for Enable are X2 X4 X5 X6 and X7 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 25 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 3 2 of 5 Line Dialer Configuration Options Blind Dial Pause 2sec Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec This configuration option only appears when Dial Tone Detect is configured for Disable Blind Dial Pause Determines how long the modem waits before dialing a telephone number when Dialtone Detect is disabled NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries The AT command is S Register S6 n where n is from 2 to 255 in 1 second increments BusyTone Detect Enable Nxt Enable Disable Busy Tone Detect Sets the modem to monitor for Busy Tone Enable or ignore Busy Tone Disable NOTE This configuration option is normally enabled however if the modem receives false busy tones this configuration option can
57. factory setting is Disable 0 S26 RTS to CTS Delay Register sets the length of time in 10 millisecond Configure Edit DTE Interface 1 The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries 5 16 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 4 3 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S40 Auto Make Busy Register determines if the modem goes off hook Configure Edit under certain conditions This register should only be enabled when Line Dialer the modem is located behind a user s Private Branch Exchange PBX This register is only valid for Model 3911 modems Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable S41 Dial Line Rate Register determines the modem s data rate and Configure Edit modulation scheme for operation on dial lines Dial Line Register has the following values 1 14 400 V 32bis 2 12 000 V 32bis 3 9600 V 32bis 4 7200 V 32bis 5 4800 V 32bis 2400 V 22bis 1200 V 22 1200 212A 0 300 V 21 11 0 300 103J 12 1200 75 V 23 13 75 1200 V 23 18 600 75 V 23 19 75 600 V 23 20 19 200 V 32 terbo 21 16 800 V 32 terbo The factory setting is 19200 V 32 terbo S43 V 32bis Train Register controls the modem s train time for Configure Edit V 32bis V 32 mode Dial Line Register has the following
58. if the LeasedLine Rate is configured for TMp m Enable The DTE forces the modem into remote loopback when the signal on Pin 21 CCITT 140 is turned ON Remote Loop ends when the signal is dropped m Disable The DTE does not initiate remote loopback in response to the signal on Pin 21 The AT command is S Register S51 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable DTE LL CT141 Disable Nxt Disable Enable DTE Local Loopback Controls the use of Pin 18 of the EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 interface by the DTE to initiate a local loopback An Abort command or test time out ends this test m Enable The DTE forces the modem into local loopback when the signal on Pin 18 CCITT 141 is turned ON Local loopback ends when the signal is dropped m Disable The DTE will not initiate local loopback in response to the signal on Pin 18 The AT command is S Register S52 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 4 46 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 7 2 of 2 Test Configuration Options Test Timeout Disable Nxt Disable 30sec 60sec 240sec Test Time out Determines how long a test runs before aborting m Disable Allows a test to run indefinitely 30 60 or 240 seconds Allows the test to run for 30 seconds 60 seconds or 240 seconds The AT command is S Register S18 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 to 255 seconds Rcv Remote Loop Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration op
59. in the PList Display branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key The Clear function does not appear in Remote mode Clear deletes the modem s poll list To access Clear from the PList branch make the following selection Poll List gt A Display Clear 2 lt n gt Select Clear The message Command Complete appears on the second line of the LCD to indicate that the poll list has been cleared To exit this function and remain in the PList branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key The Change function does not appear in Remote Change allows you to change the modem s poll list To access Change from the PList branch make the following selections Poll List A Clear Change A 8 gt Press the key until Change appears Select Change Change allows you to add modems to the Active poll list Active delete modems from both Active and Skip poll lists Delete and move modems from the Active to the Skip poll list 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 27 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Add Poll List Chang gt A Delete A m em nj To implement Change select the appropriate function Active Delete or Skip For Skip you will need to press the key until Skip appears Poll List yyyyyy Aa E TXXx 20
60. is masked 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 33 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Make Busy Remove Make Busy The Make Busy function forces the modem off hook so it cannot answer a call This is often used with PBX systems to permit the busy out of a PBX port for rotary or hunt groups WARNING To prevent violations of FCC and DOC regulations this function must only be used behind a user s PBX To access Make Busy from the Control branch make the following selections Control CA a A m bm 8 85 we Press the gt key until Make Busy appears Select Make Busy Make Busy A Command A lt EB re gt The modem is now in a forced busy condition Command Complete appears on the LCD To remove the modem from Make Busy mode press the AA key once and the gt key until RemoveMakeBusy appears Control A A JN J Press any function key to select RemoveMakeBusy The message Command Complete appears on the LCD 3 34 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Service Line Disconnect Service Line The Service Line function allows you to switch a specific Model 3911 installed in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier from normal leased or dial operation to service line operation This switch only places the modem on the service line For a connection to be established you must still use the
61. lists V 25bis commands supported by the 391x Series modems D 6 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 CCITT V 25bis Dialing Commands and Responses Table D 1 V 25bis Commands V 25bis Command Description ane ES e lent Call Request Commands CRN Call Request with Number Provided ATD CRS Call Request with Memory Address ATDS Call Answer Commands INC Incoming Call Indication RING DIC Disregard Incoming Call NONE CIC Connect Incoming Call ATA Program Command PRN Program Normal AT amp Z List Request RLD Request to List Delayed Numbers NONE RLF Request to List Forbidden Numbers NONE RLN Request to List Stored Numbers NONE List Response LSD List Delayed Numbers NONE LSF List Forbidden Numbers NONE LSN List Stored Numbers NONE 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table D 2 lists V 25bis response messages supported by the 391x Series modems Table D 2 V 25bis Response Messages V 25bis Command Description AT Command Result Code Equivalent Call Response CFI Call Failure Indication BUSY NO ANSWER NO CARRIER NO DIAL TONE ERROR CNX Call Connecting Indication CONNECT Command Response VAL Valid Command OK INV Invalid Command ERROR D 8 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 ASCII Character Table d Toa somre hb aie s Blea EEUU ee ek ORs E 1
62. local and remote modems In multipoint networks the remote access password must be entered at the appropriate prompt e For multipoint control modems the network management address of the tributary modem must be entered at the appropriate prompt Remote DCP access is accomplished using either the primary or secondary channel if available of the VF line Using the primary channel gives a much faster response time due to the higher data rate but it also interrupts data flow because primary data is stopped when Remote mode is active Once Remote mode is terminated the primary channel is automatically made available for data transmission Unlike primary channel communications the secondary channel operates at a slower data rate and does not interrupt data flow V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 and TMp are the only modulations available for the secondary channel 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 65 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems NOTE When initiating a Remote function from a TMp tributary modem primary channel operation is not available Also if the tributary modem is not on the control modem s poll list the error message No Trib Session appears when the function is executed To access the Remote branch make the following selections Leased 19 2 2 Security Remote A w LJ L5 E C9 Press the key until Remote appears Select Remote NOTE If a connection is not established between a
63. management address NOTE Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset NOTE A point to point tributary is always Address 1 Address values range from 001 to 256 The AT command is S Register S75 n where n is a value from 0 to 255 001 to 256 4 50 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 8 4 of 4 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Diag Connection Modem DC Nxt Modem DC NMS CC Disable This configuration option is not available if the LeaseLine Rate is configured for TMp and the NetworkPosition is configured for Tributary Diagnostic Connection Allows the configuration of the serial diagnostic port of the modem to be either a diagnostic channel that is connected to another modem DC or a control channel that is connected to a network management device CC Modem Selects the Diagnostic Channel m NMS Selects the Control Channel m Disable Prevents messages being sent from the diagnostic port Link Delay sec O 1 Nxt 01 2 5 10 20 50 Link Delay Seconds Controls the length of time in seconds a modem will wait for responses from the downstream devices This configuration option is used to calculate protocol timers for polling and normal selection NOTE The estimated roundtrip delay in the diagnostic link is entered Security The Security configuration options allow you to set the parameters that control how a dial access security pa
64. model number firmware revision level hardware part number and firmware part number Ser Serial number is an 8 digit number that identifies the modem Mod Model number is an alphanumeric number that identifies the modem as either a Model 3910 or Model 3911 modem FRev Firmware revision level is an alphanumeric number that identifies the level of firmware loaded in the modem HPt Hardware part number is an 11 digit number that identifies the circuit card in the modem FPt Firmware part number is an 11 digit number that identifies to customer service personnel the firmware release number To exit the Identity function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the Z3 key 3 20 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation DTE DTE displays the state and or activity of the following interface leads LSD DTR DSR Tst TXD RXD RTS and CTS The interface leads status is updated every 5 seconds To access DTE from the Status branch make the following selections TESTA Z Identity Gm l e ewe Press gt key until DTE appears Select DTE DSR Tst gt A _ E HU _ L8 8 The activity and state of modem s DTE signal appear on LCD s bottom line Press gt key to scroll other signals into view The LCD s bottom line displays a pair of symbols for each interface lead The fir
65. of the customer When installed in the final configuration the product must comply with the applicable Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed If necessary consult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance A rare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings If products installed in separate buildings are interconnected the voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and if necessary implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products In addition if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits take the following precautions Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 B COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Notices
66. options e 2 wire operations e 4 wire operations w o TEK leads e 4 wire operations with TEK leads TEK leads are for loopback purposes A 50 pin version is being considered for multiple line connections 8 POSITION PLUG PIN NO 6 POSITION PLUG PIN NO oa A U Figure C 3 Wiring Diagram 8 Position to 6 Position Crossover Cable 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 C 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To connect a Model 3910 port to another modem s EIA 232 D interface use a 25 pin crossover cable Figure C 4 25 POSITION PLUG PIN NO TXD RXD RTS DSR 5 LSD RXC DTR XTXC AN O ON Ln po o 13 TO PO m m MY HM H 2a Ba 2 2 a A N O O N DO OH Ff 25 POSITION PLUG PIN NO AN Dak ON TXD RXD RTS DSR 5 LSD RXC DTR XTXC Figure C 4 Wiring Diagram 25 Pin Crossover Cable C 6 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 CCITT V 25bis Dialing Commands and Responses sl FM T D 1 Call Request Commands Jui oi oce spen ie Sen c P here D 2 Call Request with Number Provided CRN D 2 Call Request with Stored Memory Address Provided CRS D 2 SPOUSE s doses de enero p TII ee ea Quemar sed bee ee D 2 Call Failure Indication CFI D 2 Call Connecting CNX rere RP RA ER iad D 3
67. press the gt key until the MPtCloneResults screen appears to view the results of the last multiple TMp clone operation If the message Trib List Empty appears this indicates that a multiple download was never initiated MPtCloneResults PS Nxt XXX Pass L8 85 The address field xxx displays the network management address of one of the remote modems Pressing the F1 key allows you to select various remote modems to determine the download result for those modems Pass or Fail Implementing a Clone Remote Operation WARNING The modem begins a transfer of its own program to the remote modem This process takes the communication link out of service for several minutes depending on the data rate of the link If the Clone Remote process is started and then interrupted the remote modem is left in a partially programmed state in which its functional capabilities are limited to those required to initiate and complete another download attempt 3 40 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Warning Download A pug enu mj At this point if you do not want to continue this process abort transfer by selecting function key This returns the modem to the DwnLoadSoftware menu However to continue with the transfer press gt key to display the Reprogram Remote selection Warning Download CA CENTA a
68. receives a CT140 signal from the DTE Tests Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 52 DTE LL CT141 Register determines if the modem performs a local Configure Edit analog loopback if it receives a CT141 signal from the DTE Tests Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 5 19 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 4 6 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S53 V 54 Address Identifies the address of the modem to be placed in a Configure Edit loopback test Tests Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 34 Modem address The factory setting is Disable 554 V 54 Device Type Identifies where the modem is physically located in Configure WEdit the network Tests Register has the following values 0 Peripheral 1 Intermediate The factory setting is Peripheral 55 Access From Remote Register determines if a modem s DCP can be Configure Edit accessed by a remote modem Misc Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable S56 Remote Access Password Register allows entry of the first pair Configure Edit leftmost of digits of a remote access password Any value from 00 to Misc 99 is valid For example if the remote access password is 12345678
69. result code text if error control is used For example CONNECT 9600 EC Add V 42 or MNP Places either the V 42 or MNP suffix after the result code text if data compression is used For example CONNECT 9600 V42b Use DTE Rate Allows the DTE rate to be displayed in the Connect message instead of the line rate This feature is required in some modem pooling applications NOTE NO DIALTONE is valid only if Dial Tone Detect configuration option is enabled BUSY appears if Busy Detect configuration option is enabled The AT command for Disable is XO The AT commands for Enable are X1 X2 X3 or X4 The AT command for Add EC is X5 The AT command for Add V42 MNP is X6 The AT command for Use DTE Rate is X7 ResultCode Form Words Nxt Words Numbers 1 Numbers 2 This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Result Codes Format Controls whether or not result codes appear as words or as numeric codes Some DTEs do not recognize Result Codes as words therefore numbers are required The Numbers 2 format is required for some modem pooling applications For a list of Result Codes refer to Table 5 1 in Chapter 5 AT Commands and S Registers The AT command for Numbers 1 is VO The AT command for Words format is V1 The AT command for Numbers 2 is V2 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 23 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 2 5 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options
70. sequence or long space disconnect This is also known as a graceful disconnect since the other modem receives advance notice of a disconnection m Enable Use this setting if the DTE requires that the modem be made available as soon as possible after receiving a disconnect command NOTE This abrupt method of disconnecting may cause problems with the remote modem which may interpret the disconnection as an error instead of a valid disconnect The AT command is S Register S85 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable Line Crnt Disc Enab gt 8msec Nxt Enab gt 8msec Enab gt 90msec Disable This configuration option does not appear on Models 3910 A1 401 and 3911 B1 001 Line Current Disconnect Determines the modem s response to short interruptions of line current The loss of line current is one method of disconnecting a call m Enable gt 8 millisecond Disconnects the modems if line current is disrupted for more than 8 milliseconds m Enable gt 90 millisecond Disconnects the modems if line current is disrupted for more than 90 milliseconds Use this setting if the modem constantly disconnects when set to Enab gt 8msec m Disable Ignores any disruptions in line current such as call waiting The AT command is S Register S65 n where n is 0 for Enable gt 8 msec 1 for Enable gt 90 msec and 2 for Disable Long Space Disc Enable Nxt Enable Disable Long Space Disconnect Determines the modem s response to
71. stored in memory If Synchronous Leased Originate Asynchronous Leased Answer or Originate Trellis Multipoint TMp Control or Tributary Async Dial Sync Dial or UNIX Dial is more appropriate for your configuration then you must change the factory setting using either the modem s DCP or the AT command set as described in the following sections The purpose of having preset configurations is so that you can have a head start in getting your modem operating and reducing the amount of time required to configure your modem For a better understanding of DCP operation and factory preset configuration options refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration Using the Diagnostic Control Panel DCP The DCP s liquid crystal display LCD consists of two 16 character lines which display modem status control functions and configuration options as well as indicating your location in the Top Level menu tree Appendix A To change a factory template from the Sync Leased preset configuration using the DCB perform the following steps 1 Press the function key below Configure to select the Configure branch The LCD now displays Ld EditArea frm 2 Press the key until Factory comes into view then press the F1 key to display the factory preset configurations Factory preset configurations are Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Trellis Multipoint Async Dial Sync Dial and UNIX Dial If Sync Leased or Async Leased is selected you must choose either
72. that attaches to the front of a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Its functionality is very similar to that of the DCP Installed in one COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier it controls and monitors modems in all the carriers in the cabinet A single SDCP can control up to 8 carriers with a total of 128 modems Shared Diagnostic Unit A circuit card that plugs into a dedicated slot in the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier to provide the SDCP and network management interfaces to the modems in the carrier It translates the network management protocol to the devices in the carrier and routes incoming messages to the appropriate slots A data transmission channel with a lower signaling rate than the primary channel It is mostly used for modem diagnostics An SDCP key that allows the selection of a specific card slot in the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier A way of transmitting data in which bits are sent sequentially one at a time Registers that contain information affecting the modem parameters All S Registers must be preceded by the AT prefix Sub Network Health and Status A display of alarm occurrences in downstream modems Data transmission that is synchronized by timing signals Characters are sent at a fixed rate This type of transmission is more efficient than asynchronous transmission 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 GL 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Time Division Multiplexer TDM TMp Top Level menu training trell
73. the test If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to the Test section in Chapter 4 To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Loc Digital Loop Loc Digital Loop is issued by a local modem and forces it to loopback any data received from the remote modem Figure 3 6 This test operates the same as a CCITT V 54 Loop 2 except it is issued at your modem This is useful if a remote modem is incapable of initiating a remote digital loopback from its location For this test to operate properly the modems must be operating at the same rate and in Synchronous or Asynchronous Direct mode TRANSMITTER DTE NETWORK INTERFACE INTERFACE RECEIVER LOCAL MODEM 491 13078 Figure 3 6 Local Digital Loopback 3 50 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Pattern To access Loc Digital Loop from the Test branch make the following selections Test A A a 8 8 Press the gt key until Loc Digital Loop appears Press any function key to start this test Test Digitl Loop A Started A lt a fre 8j gt The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED lights If Invalid Command appears on the LCD another test is in progress Select Abort to clear the current test and try again If the Test
74. to Point Diagnostic 2400 bps or 1200 bps modulation Allows the modem to use a non standard point to point modulation capable of secondary channel diagnostics while running at 2400 bps or 1200 bps NOTE This configuration option must be the same in both the local and remote modems NOTE The 1200 bps selection is available only if the Proprietary 1200 device option is installed Dial TX Level The factory default setting is country dependent It is Permissv 9 in North America Nxt Permissv 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Dial Transmit Level Selects the modem s transmit power level over dial lines The transmit output level can be selected in 1 dBm decrements from 9 dBm to 32 dBm NOTE In North America the range of allowable values is 10 dBm to 32 dBm plus Permissive 9 dBm This configuration option is locked in other countries the user cannot change the level The AT command is amp In where n is from 10 to 32 corresponding to 10 dBm to 32 dBm 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 31 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 4 3 of 3 Dial Line Configuration Options V22b Guard Tone Disable Nxt Disable 550Hz 1800Hz This configuration option only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V 22bis or V 22 data rate or when V 32bis Automode is configured for Enable V 22bis Guard Tone Determines whe
75. to the Model 3910 Modems Figure 2 1 shows how Model 3910 modems are connected to certain TELCO jack types using the appropriate cables For pin assignments refer to Appendix C DTE2 DTE3 DTE 4 CO bea LEASED DIAL DTE 1 NMS PWR ON OFF MN EIN 4 x 8 POSITION Rc 8 CONDUCTOR o PLUG FOR DB 25 P LEASED LINE CONNECTOR NETWORK OPERATION FOR DATA i TERMINAL EQUIPMENT OPERATION 6 POSITION 4 CONDUCTOR SUB MINIATURE PLUG FOR 4 CONDUCTOR PERMISSIVE PLUG FOR DIAL NETWORK NETWORK OPERATION J MANAGEMENT OPERATION POWER P SUPPLY NOTE THE DIAL JACK IS ALSO USED FOR 2 WIRE LEASED BACKUP Figure 2 1 Model 3910 Rear Panel and Power Supply 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 2 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems DTE Connection Use the following procedures to connect the EIA 232 D cable from the modem to the DTE 1 Make sure the modem s rear panel power switch is OFF 2 Connect the DB 25 P plug conn
76. transmits a summary of these statistics to the NMS The NMS uses this data to produce utilization reports Call Progress Only The modem transmits detailed modem status information to the NMS These messages include any events that can display on the LCD NOTE For 6800 Series NMS applications Disable must be selected The AT commands are S Register S66 n where n is 0 for Call Connect amp Progress 1 for Disable 2 for Call Connect Only and 3 for Call Progress Only NetworkPosition Tributary End Tributary Control Network Position Identification Each modem must be identified either as a control modem or a tributary modem NOTE Changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset NOTE This configuration option is only applicable for leased line network management applications For the Model 3910 Tributary is the factory default For the Model 3911 Control is the factory default The AT command for Tributary is 57420 The AT command for Control is 574 1 NetMngmtAddress 256 Nxt 1 256 This configuration option is not available in point to point tributaries Network Management Address Determines the address used when accessing a modem from the NMS or when using DCP functions that require network management addresses Within a network link a control modem can communicate with a tributary modem by using the tributary modem s network management address Each tributary modem must have a different network
77. values 0 Long 1 Short The factory setting is Long 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 5 17 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 4 4 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S44 Leased Line Rate Register determines the modem s data rate and Configure Edit modulation scheme for operation on either 2 wire or 4 wire leased Leased Line lines in either Answer or Originate mode Register has the following values 1 14 400 V 32bis 2 12 000 V 32bis 3 9600 V 32bis 4 7200 V 32bis 5 4800 V 32bis 6 2400 V 22bis 11 14 400 V 33 12 12 000 V 33 13 9600 V 29 14 7200 V 29 15 4800 V 29 16 4800 V 27 17 2400 V 27bis 18 19 200 V 32 terbo 19 16 800 V 32 terbo 20 19 200 TMp 21 14 400 TMp 22 9600 TMp 23 7200 TMp 24 4800 TMp 25 2400 TMp The factory setting is 19200 V 32 terbo 45 Leased Tx Level Register determines the modem s transmit power Configure Edit output level over leased lines Leased Line Enter a value from 0 to 15 dBm The factory setting is 0 dBm S46 Auto Dial Backup Register determines if the modem performs an Configure Edit automatic dial backup if the leased lines fail Leased Line Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 2 The range of allowable values is 0 through 15 in North America and 1 th
78. values is 10 dBm to 32 dBm This command is disabled in some countries it answers OK but does not change the level amp Ln Leased Mode Configure Edit Leased Line 5 10 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 3 5 of 8 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence amp Mn and Async Sync Mode and DTE Dialer Type Configure Edit gan amp MO amp 00 Modem operates in Asynchronous mode and uses AT Due ile Command protocol amp M1 amp Q1 Modem operates in Synchronous mode and uses AT Command protocol amp M2 amp Q2 Modem operates in Synchronous mode and dials telephone number stored in directory location 1 when DTR signal turns OFF and then ON amp M3 amp Q3 Modem operates in Synchronous mode and uses AT Command protocol The amp M2 and amp Q2 commands disable the use of AT commands and force the modem into Dumb mode The only way to gain control of the modem is via the DCP amp Rn RTS Action Configure Edit amp RO Standard RS232 amp R1 Ignores RTS amp R2 Simulated Control Carrier amp R3 Control Carrier amp Sn DSR Control Configure Edit amp 50 Forced DTE Interface amp 51 Standard 5232 amp 52 Wink When Disconnect amp S3 Follows DTR amp S4 On Early amp 55 Delay to DTE amp Tn Tests Test amp TO Abort Stops any test in progress amp T4 and amp T5 amp T1 Local Analog Loop Configure Edit
79. 0 Series modem via the Remote branch of the Top Level menu the Remote Access Password must be the same for both modems By following these procedures you learn how to load a factory preset configuration area in this case Sync Leased how to edit a configuration option Remote Access Password and how to save changes to a configuration area Active Saved The shaded key indicates what key to press e A Status Configure A le E CJ Select Configure from the Top Level menu LdEditAreafrm gt A Activ Operating A lt F1 F2 F3 gt LdEditAreafrm A A 98 5 Scroll across the LCD and select the Factory configuration area 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Ld Fact Preset gt A Ene Select Sync Leased Choose Mode 20 Originate co WB Select Answer Choose Function A Br Save lt F e Select Edit Edit StrapGroup gt DTE Interface LJ Le Edit StrapGroup A ET Misc 9 Eg Scroll across the LCD and select the Misc configuration options group 4 6 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration StrapsWhenDisc gt A w No_Change A 5 RemAccssPasswrd
80. 00 F3 300 EIA 323 D V 24 Crossover Cable 818 2759 0111 6 position 6 wire modular cord 125 0040 0031 8 position 8 wire modular cord 125 0053 1431 871A Adapter 002 0026 0031 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 Active Operating Active Saved ADp analog loop analog signal Answer mode ASCII asynchronous transmission AT command set AT prefix autobaud automatic answer Glossary A configuration area containing configuration options currently in use by the modem Anytime a power cycle occurs or a reset is performed or a save is issued using the DCP this area is updated with the contents of Active Saved A nonvolatile configuration area containing the most recently saved configuration options Advanced Diagnostic protocol An enhanced diagnostic communication protocol used with the 6800 Series NMS and with certain DCP diagnostic functions See local analog loop A signal such as a voice that varies continuously The modem is in a state where it is ready to receive an incoming call This code American Standard Code for Information Interchange is 7 bit code which establishes compatibility between data services ASCII is the standard for data transmission over telephone lines The ASCII code consists of 32 control characters nondisplayed and 96 displayed characters Refer to Appendix E A data transmission that is synchronized by a transmission sta
81. 1 External Modem derives external transmit clock source provided on Pin 24 for synchronous data amp X2 Receive Clock Loop Modem derives transmit clock source from receive signal for synchronous data Pin 17 amp Zn x Store Telephone Numbers Modem saves the telephone numbers and Call Setup dial command modifiers if any entered for x up to 40 characters in Change length in Directory Location n 1 24 For example the command Directory AT amp Z1 5551234 stores the telephone number 555 1234 into directory location 1 To clear a telephone number from a memory location issue the amp Zn x command without entering a telephone number An Maximum Frame Size Configure Edit A0 64 bytes V42 MNP Buffer M 128 bytes 2 192 bytes 256 bytes A4 32 bytes A5 16 bytes Cn Error Control Negotiate Buffer Configure Edit co Disable V42 MNP Buffer 1 Enable C2 Disables and switches modem to Buffer mode 5 12 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 3 7 of 8 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Description Command Sequence Dn CTS Control Configure Edit DO Forced On Forces CTS to always ON DTE Interface D1 Standard RS232 D2 Wink When Disconnect CTS is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect D3 Follows DTR The state of CTS follows the state of DTR D4 Follows RTS The state of CTS follows the state
82. 1 n where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 17 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 1 9 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options CT111 Rate Cntl Disable Nxt Disable Fallback1 Fallback2 CT111 Rate Control Allows the DTE to control modem rate via Pin 23 of the EIA 232 D interface This configuration option determines the effect of the DTE Rate control signal CT111 is also known as CH on the EIA 232 D interface m Disable Disregards CT111 Rate Control m Fallback1 Forces the modem to decrease its configured data rate to the next lower data rate when CT 111 is OFF Valid only for V 32bis V 33 V 29 modulation Modem will only fall back within the same modulation scheme When CT111 turns ON the modem returns to its previous data rate m Fallback2 Not available for TMp tributaries Forces the modem to decrease two data rates while remaining in the same modulation scheme When CT111 turns ON the modem returns to its previous data rate NOTE This configuration option is only valid in Async Direct mode and Synchronous mode For proper operation disable the V 32bis Autorate and V 32bis Automode configuration options The AT command is S Register S61 n where n is 0 for Disable 1 for Fallback1 and 2 for Fallback2 DTE Rate VF Disable End Disable Enable This configuration option does not appear if Async Sync is configured for Sync DTE Rate VF Forces the DTE s data rate to
83. 12000 Connection at 12 000 bps 14 13 CONNECT 14400 Connection at 14 400 bps 15 14 CONNECT 19200 Connection at 19 200 bps 16 15 CONNECT 7200 Connection at 7200 bps 17 17 CONNECT 16800 Connection at 16 800 bps 19 19 CONNECT 300 Connection at 300 bps 20 10 CONNECT 2400 EC Connection at 2400 bps with error control 21 11 CONNECT 4800 EC Connection at 4800 bps with error control 22 12 CONNECT 4800 EC Connection at 4800 bps with error control 23 16 CONNECT 12000 EC Connection at 12 000 bps with error control 24 13 CONNECT 14400 EC Connection at 14 400 bps with error control 25 17 CONNECT 16800 EC Connection at 16 800 bps with error control displays the DTE data rate instead of the line rate Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Add EC If this configuration option is set for Add V42 MNP then either V42b V42 MNP5 MNP4 MNP3 MNP2 or NoEC appears Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is enabled Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Use DTE Rate This 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 5 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 1 2 of 2 Result Codes i di ioa Word Description 26 15 CONNECT 7200 EC Connection at 7200 bps with error control 27 5 CONNECT 1200 EC Connection at 1200 bps with error control 28 28 CONNECT 38400 Connection at 38
84. 24 DTE Interface 4 9 4 19 Leased Line 4 33 4 38 Line Dialer 4 25 4 29 Misc 4 48 4 51 Security 6 13 6 16 Test 4 46 4 47 V 42 MNP Buffer 4 38 4 46 Configure branch 3 8 3 25 4 1 4 4 4 8 Control branch 3 8 3 30 3 45 Customer 1 configurations 4 1 Customer 2 configurations 4 1 Customer Support 1 6 data compression 4 40 data rates See rates DATAKIT 4 16 4 20 default configuration options 2 6 2 8 4 1 F 2 F 7 diagnostic control panel DCP configurations See configuration options description 1 3 1 5 3 2 3 3 menu tree 3 8 A 1 A 3 messages 3 9 3 14 3 23 3 24 operation 2 6 2 7 3 6 3 8 4 5 4 8 6 7 status indicators LEDs 3 4 3 6 diagnostic tests See Test branch dial access security See Security answering a call auto answer 3 63 4 25 manual answer 3 57 3 64 4 25 backup 2 4 3 35 3 54 3 57 3 59 2 command modifiers 3 61 5 5 5 6 DCP controlled 3 54 3 62 manual dial See Talk Data network connection 2 4 B 4 B 5 stored telephone number 3 59 3 62 5 12 Index 2 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Index Dial Line configuration options group 4 30 4 32 digital loopback 3 49 3 51 dimensions 1 9 directory telephone number 3 59 3 62 disconnecting a call 3 56 3 57 Download Software 3 35 3 42 DTE connection 2 4 B 3 status 3 4 3 6 3 21 DTE Dialer configuration options group 4 19 4 24 DTE Interface configuration options group 4 9 4
85. 400 bps 29 14 CONNECT 19200 EC Connection at 19 200 bps with error control 30 30 CONNECT 57600 Connection at 57 600 bps 77 77 FORBIDDEN Forbidden number 78 78 DELAYED Delayed number Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is enabled Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Use DTE Rate This displays the DTE data rate instead of the line rate Only appears when the Extended Result Codes configuration option is set for Add EC If this configuration option is set for Add V42 MNP then either V42b V42 MNP5 MNP4 MNP3 MNP2 or NoEC appears AT Command List AT commands are issued from an asynchronous DTE such as a PC and control the modem s operation and software configuration AT commands are only applicable when the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT Refer to the amp Mn and amp Qn commands Table 5 2 lists all AT commands supported by the 391x Series modem The first column lists the AT command The second column defines and lists all possible values for that command The Async Dial factory default is listed in bold The third column lists the key sequence used to enter the equivalent DCP command Use this to reference commands in Chapter 3 or Chapter 4 if further description is necessary AT Command Format AT commands are entered in Command mode using the following format TYPE ATXn Where X is the AT command and is the sp
86. 6 6 1 Overview Menu Tree ONENEN somre ianea Bieta aes ag ig Gee eae I ha os 1 Pages 2 3 provide a menu tree for the 391x Series modems 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Displays current status of modem along with data rate and error control mode to next page y Tributary only Ld EditArea frm Display Clear m Add Acquire Active Activ Operating Customer2 Factory Sup 8 Customer1 Active Saved Sync Leased TMp Sync Dial Async Leased Async Dial UNIX Dial ists pads Choose Mode DeviceHS Identity Backup Record ions VF DTE Options Control Trib Major Ser Display Answer Originate Minor Mod Clear Status FRev Line Pri 4W APL Dial HPt Line Pri 2W APL Thresh FPt Line Bkup 2W APL Security Line Dial Backup Port1 Line Dial ONLY Line No Sync SigQual LSD RevLevel 2 DTR Sig Noise DSR NrEchL vi Tst Choose Function FarEchL vi TXD FarEchDel RXD EchoFreqOff RTS NonLnearDis CTS Edit StrapGroup Save Retrains 1 These parameters will appear for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations Active Saved Customer 2 2 These parameters will appear for Trellis Multi point modulation Sync Leased Template only to next page DTE Interface DTE Dialer g Line Dialer Dial Lin
87. 800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b 19200 TMp 14400 TMp 9600 TMp 7200 TMp 4800 TMp 2400 TMp 2400 V22bis 14400 V33 12000 V33 9600 V29 7200 V29 4800 V29 4800 V27bis 2400 V27bis Leased Line Rate Determines the modem s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on leased lines NOTE Certain changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset m 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b The modem operates using V 32bis or V 32 terbo modulation at the data rate selected These modulation schemes are available on 2 wire or 4 wire leased lines m 19200 TMp 14400 TMp 9600 TMp 7200 TMp 4800 TMp 2400 TMp The modem operates in Trellis Multipoint mode at the data rate selected These modulation schemes are available on 4 wire leased lines The 19200 TMp modulation does not appear on tributary modems NOTE TMp control modems can accept mixed inbound rates from tributary modems For example one inbound link may be configured for 14 4 kbps while another link experiencing line impairments may be configured for 9 6 kbps The following control tributary rate combinations are allowed control at 19 2 kbps tributaries at 14 4 or 9 6 kbps control at 14 4 kbps tributaries at 14 4 or 9 6 kbps control at 9 6 kbps tributaries at 9 6 or 7 2 kbps control at 7 2 kbps tributaries at 7 2 or 4 8 kbps control at 4 8 kbps tributaries at 4 8 or 2 4 kbps
88. A of this manual contains the Universal Service Order Codes USOC associated with the services on which the equipment is to be connected An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug is provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack which is Part 68 compliant See Installation Instructions for details The ringer equivalence REN is used to determine the quantity of devices which may be connected to the telephone line Excessive RENs on the telephone line may result in the devices not ringing in response to an incoming call In most but not all areas the sum of the RENs should not exceed five 5 0 To be certain of the number of devices that may be connected to the line as determined by the total RENS contact the telephone company to determine the maximum RENS for the calling area If the 391x Series modem causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company will notify you in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required But if advance notice is not practical the telephone company will notify the customer as soon as possible Also you will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC if you believe it is necessary The telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment If this happens the t
89. AREN ERROR NETWORK CORRECTION DEVICE ALARM TEST DIAL BACKUP MODE Figure 3 2 Optional SDCP Model 3911 Faceplate and Optional SDU 3 4 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation The standalone Model 3910 modem s DCP has 13 light emitting diodes LEDs and the carrier mounted Model 3911 has 16 LEDs These LEDs are listed and described in Table 3 1 LEDs specific to one model type have the appropriate model number shown in the table Table 3 1 Model 3910 and Model 3911 DCP LEDs Label Color Indicates Pwr green Power has been applied to the modem Alrm red Flashing A major alarm has been detected in a remote 391x Series modem ON A major alarm has been detected in the local modem For Health and Status alarm conditions refer to Table 3 6 in the Device Health and Status DeviceHS section of this chapter Diag green The modem is receiving diagnostic communications either a command or a 3910 only status poll Test 142 yellow Flashing The modem is involved in a firmware upgrade Normal operation is not possible ON The modem is involved in a test Normal operation is not possible OFF The modem is not involved in a test or firmware upgrade Dial yellow Flashing The modem is attempting to establish a call over the dial network or the modem is in Dial Standby mode ON The modem has established a dial connection OFF A dial connection does not exist RI 125
90. ASCII EBCDIC This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer is configured for V 25bis HDLC or V 25bis Bsync V 25bis Coding Identifies to the modem whether the DTE is using ASCII code or EBCDIC code for V 25bis commands The modem responds to the DTE using the same coding The AT command is S Register S62 n where n is 0 for ASCII or 1 for EBCDIC V25bis IdleFill Mark Nxt Mark Flag This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer is configured for V 25bis HDLC V 25bis Idle Fill Determines whether a mark or flag is used as an idle fill character for the DTE The modem responds to the DTE using the same idle fill The AT command is S Register S63 n where n is 0 for Mark or 1 for Flag V25b NewLineChr CR LF End CR LF CR LF This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer is configured for V 25 bis Async V 25bis New Line Character Sets the modem for the command line terminator used by the DTE in V 25bis Async mode The modem responds to the DTE using the same line terminator The AT command is S Register S64 n where n is 0 for carriage return and line feed 1 for carriage return or 2 for line feed 4 24 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Line Dialer The Line Dialer configuration options establish parameters used by the modem to answer or originate calls Table 4 3 shows each Line Dialer configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory d
91. AT command for CntrisOnHook is amp D4 The AT command for CntrlsTxMute is amp D5 4 12 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 1 4 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options DSR Control Stndrd RS232 Nxt Stndrd RS232 Forced On WinkWhenDisc Follows Early Delay ToData Data Set Ready Control DSR is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating the modem is connected and ready for operation m Standard RS232 Allows the modem to control DSR to the DTE The modem raises DSR when it begins the handshake process DSR lowers upon disconnect The modem is not ready to receive data until DSR CTS and LSD are active An ON state indicates to the DTE that the modem is ready to receive data An OFF state indicates that the modem is not ready to receive data and the DTE will not send data to the modem During a Local Analog Loop and a Remote Digital Loop DSR is ON m Forced On Forces DSR output ON constantly This is usually used for leased line applications and when the DTE requires DSR to always be ON Wink When Disconnect DSR is normally forced ON but is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect Follows DTR When the modem receives DTR from the DTE it sends DSR to the DTE On Early DSR is low when the modem is in the idle state DSR goes high immediately upon a command to enter Data mode This setting is required for some modem pooling applications Delay to Data Operation is si
92. Active Operating configuration area 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 31 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To access Reset from the Control branch make the following selection Control gt A ES A It Gy m Select Reset The message Reset appears momentarily before the modem performs the power up diagnostic test sequence Data Stream The Data Stream function is not available in Async mode Use Data Stream to enable or disable the modem s data transmitter function To access Data Stream from the Control branch make the following selections Control ZN Data Stream Press the gt key until Data Stream appears Select Data Stream The Data Stream action which is available Disable or Enable appears on the second line of the LCD beside the word If the modem s data transmitter is enabled the word Disable appears to indicated that you may disable the data transmitter by selecting this action Data Stream CA BR Disable A If you want to disable the modem s data stream press the F2 key When the message Command Complete appears press the A key to clear the message Data Stream A Porti Enable A Press the F2 key again to enable the modem s data stream 3 32 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation To exit this function and remain in the Control branch press the
93. BufferMode DirectMode LAPM or Disc LAPM or Bufr This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Error Control Mode Determines the type of error control used by the modem In most cases V42 MNPorBfr is the best choice If V 42bis and MNP are enabled then the modem uses the following priority for error control negotiation V 42bis V 42 MNP 5 and below Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs m V 42 MNP or Buffer Modem attempts to connect in V 42 Error Control mode using V 42 Link Access Procedure for Modems protocol If this fails the modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem connects in Buffer mode and continues operation This is also known as V42 MNP Autoreliable Mode m V 42 MNP or Disconnect Modem attempts to connect in V 42 Error Control mode using V 42 LAPM protocol If this fails the modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem disconnects This is also known as Reliable mode m MNP or Buffer Modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem connects in Buffer mode This is also known as MNP Autoreliable Mode m MNP or Disconnect Modem attempts to connect in MNP mode If this fails the modem disconnects This is also known as Reliable mode m Buffer Mode Modem does not use error control and allows the DTE rate to differ from the communications line rate This mode should only be used if the DTE provide
94. C 4 C 3 Wiring Diagram 8 Position to 6 Position Crossover Cable C 5 C 4 Wiring Diagram 25 Pin Crossover C 6 G 1 Sample Configuration Point to Point G 2 G 2 Sample Configuration Multipoint G 3 G 3 Sample Configuration Point to Point with Automatic Dial Backup G 4 G 4 Sample Configuration Point to Point with Network Management G 5 G 5 Sample Configuration Carrier with Network Management G 6 G 6 Sample Configuration Extended G 7 G 7 Sample Configuration Extended Diagnostics G 9 iv November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Table of Contents List of Tables Table Page 1 1 Technical Specifications for 391x Series 1 8 3 1 Model 3910 Model 3911 DCP LEDs 3 5 3 l SDGOPLEDS sede nace in La ERE NUR PUE Re E ee due d 3 6 3 3 Top Level Menu Status us ois PE RES ERES 3 9 3 4 Common Operational Messages sos ue peek ex 3 12 355 Dial Access Security Messages pen s WO VERE 3 13 3 6 Healthand Status Messages esee pk OR LEES VERS 3 17 3 7 Backup tatus Screens osse ca Redes EE Nes ex Ps ATE VERS 3 23 3 8 V
95. C 4 technical specifications 1 8 1 10 telephone external 3 62 C 4 telephone numbers display 3 56 storage 3 60 Test branch 3 8 3 46 3 53 Abort 3 46 3 47 Local Analog Loopback 3 48 3 49 Local Digital Loopback 3 50 3 5 1 Pattern 3 51 3 53 Remote Digital Loopback 3 49 3 50 Self 3 47 3 48 Test configuration options group 4 46 4 47 TMP default configurations See default configuration options top level menu messages 3 9 3 14 Trellis Multipoint TMp 3 9 3 10 3 14 3 15 3 19 3 20 3 38 3 66 3 67 Troubleshooting 1 5 United States government requirements 1 5 1 6 UNIX dial 2 6 4 1 4 10 V 25bis dialing commands and response D 1 D 8 V 42bis data compression 4 40 V 42 error control 4 39 V 42 MNP Buffer configuration options group 4 38 4 46 VF connection 2 4 B 4 B 5 interface requirements 1 9 pin assignments C 3 status 3 19 3 20 VF Thresholds Update 3 42 3 45 weight 1 9 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 Index 7
96. COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 1 7 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options LSD Control Stndrd RS232 Nxt Stndrd RS232 Forced On WinkWhenDisc Follows Sim DTR DiscOFF Line Signal Detect Control LSD is a signal indicating that the carrier signal is being received from the remote modem It is normally turned OFF to the DTE when the power level of the received carrier signal drops below the carrier detect threshold m Standard RS232 LSD is ON when the modem detects the remote modem s carrier signal LSD turns OFF when the carrier signal strength drops below carrier detect threshold m Forced On Forces LSD to be ON at all times m Wink When Disconnect LSD is normally forced ON but can be turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect This is used for UNIX9 DTEs m Follows DTR The state of LSD follows the state of DTR When DTR turns ON LSD turns ON When DTR turns OFF LSD turns OFF m Simulated Control Carrier LSD follows the state of RTS of the remote DTE via the V 13 simulated control carrier signaling This is required for hosts that cannot support full duplex operation If LSD Control is set to simulated control carrier then the RTS Action configuration option on the remote modem must be set to Simulated Control Carrier m DTR Disconnect OFF The state of LSD follows the state of DTR except when disconnecting once a connection is established In this instance DTR remains ON and LSD turns
97. Control Panel Access NOTE This page of the manual is self supporting and can be removed to prevent unwanted knowledge of the DCP security access selections Use the DCP security access function to lock the DCP of any 391x Series modem and prevent unwanted user access Two options are available for this function Grant and Deny Grant allows any branch of the Top Level menu to be accessed from the DCP Deny only allows access to the Status branch of the Top Level menu 391x Series modems are shipped from the factory with DCP access granted To access the Front Panel DCP Security Access function perform the following Press the A key three times Press 2 key twice Press the A key once Frnt Panl Acces CA ET Deny A L8 L8 Select Grant to allow access or select Deny to lock DCP access Either selection results in a return to the Top Level menu 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 69 DCP Configuration OVERVIEW sosyo e de E E SET RPG S 4 1 Corfieare Bane iu coru eee ae bep god acdc ett dad aee ren gor 4 4 Editing and Saving a Configuration Option 4 5 4 8 Configuration TABLES Ier eed ere Rr 4 9 Fitted gue bes a 4 9 DTE Dialer eb PERPE a DG 4 19 LDE DINE CD 4 25 c 4 30 Leased Line 9 e ex EE RE SRE SS 4 33 VA2IMNP Bu
98. DCP or AT command set 391x Series Modem Package After opening the modem s package check for damage and verify that the following items are present For the standalone model e Installation instructions e Model 3910 modem e Power supply e One 6 position 4 wire modular cord e One 8 position 8 wire modular cord 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 2 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems For the carrier mounted model e Installation instructions Model 3911 modem e Rear connector plate with two DB 25 S edge card connectors If any hardware components are damaged notify your service representative Return equipment using the procedures described in the Government Requirements and Equipment Return section of Chapter 1 Customer Supplied Equipment The following customer supplied equipment is required to complete a data communications system using the Model 3910 modem e A DTE with an available EIA 232 D serial port e A standard EIA 232 D cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem e One of the following modular leased or dial network interfaces 8 for leased line applications RJ11C for dial permissive applications The following customer supplied equipment is required for the installation of a Model 3911 modem e A COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier e 50 pin mass termination cable e One of the following modular or 50 pin leased or dial network interfaces RJ11C for singl
99. Disable XON XOFF This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Flow Control of Modem Determines how the DTE controls the flow of data from the modem m RTS to Modem Method of flow control in which the modem respectively starts and stops data transmission based upon the ON and OFF state of the DTE s RTS signal m Disable The DTE cannot control the flow of data from the modem m XON XOFF Method of flow control in which the modem starts and stops data flow based upon XON and XOFF characters received from the DTE The AT commands for Disable are Q0 Q2 and Q4 The AT commands for XON XOFF are Q1 and Q5 The AT commands for RTS to Modem are Q3 and Q6 4 42 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 6 5 of 8 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options XON XOFF Psthru Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Flow Control of Modem is configured for XON XOFF XON XOFF Passthrough Considers an XON XOFF character as data and passes it on to the remote modem In this case the DTE at one end of the communications link can send flow control characters to the other DTE This is also known as DTE to DTE flow control m Disable Flow control characters are processed but are not passed on to the remote modem m Enable Flow cont
100. Due to poor line conditions the modem s transmit rate is below the configured rate Refer to the Leased Line and Dial Line sections in Chapter 4 for a description of configuration options affecting rate Status Subtree Truncate Downstream health and status information has been truncated because it overflowed system limits There is a large amount of health and status information in the subnetwork This information can be recovered by sending device health and status commands to specific modems Test Mode The modem or an upstream device is running a disruptive test Disabled The modem s DTE port has been disabled On Dial Backup The modem is operating in Dial Backup mode FW Downloading A firmware download is in progress On Lease Backup The modem is operating in Lease Backup mode This status occurs only if the Dual Lease Line is enabled Primary Line Bad The modem is currently operating on the 2 wire backup facility the Lease Lookback option is enabled and the modem does not detect continuity on the primary 4 wire leased lines Backup Line Good The modem is currently operating on the primary 4 wire leased facility with 2 wire leased lines selected as the backup facility the Backup Line Check option is enabled and the modem detects continuity on the 2 wire backup leased lines Data Blocked The modem s primary data path is blocked PSTN Test Fail The modem f
101. Enable 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 45 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 6 8 of 8 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options RdcdAsyncBufSiz Disable End Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for BufferMode VA2MNPorBuf MNP or Buffr and or Bufr mode Reduced Asynchronous Buffer Size When enabled the modem s buffer size is limited to a maximum of 20 characters The AT command is S Register S97 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable Test The Test configuration options determine specifics such as the duration of a test for the various diagnostic tests available to the modem Table 4 7 shows each Test configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix E Table 4 7 1 of 2 Test Configuration Options DTE RL CT140 Disable Nxt Disable Enable DTE Remote Loopback Controls the use of Pin 21 of the EIA 232 D CCITT V 24 interface by the DTE to initiate a remote loopback An Abort command or test time out ends this test This configuration option is not available
102. FF Passthrough Flow Control Configure Edit XO Disable V42 MNP Buffer X1 Enable Error Control Fallback Character Configure Edit Where n is an ASCII value from 0 to 127 Factory default is V42 MNP Buffer 013 ASCII MNP5 Data Compression Configure Edit Disable V42 MNP Buffer C1 Enable Hn V 42bis Compression Configure Edit HQ Disable V42 MNP Buffer H1 Enable H2 Enable H3 Enable S Register List S Registers affect the operating parameters of the 391x Series modems S Registers are only applicable when the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set for AT Refer to the amp and amp Qn commands Table 5 4 lists all S Registers supported by the 391x Series modems The first column lists the S Register The second column lists all possible values for that register The third column lists the key sequence used to enter the equivalent from the DCP Use this column to reference commands in Chapter 4 if further description is necessary NOTE In some countries the range of allowable values of some S Registers are restricted If the DTE attempts to enter an illegal value the modem will answer OK but it will set the register to the closest legal value The DTE can check the actual value of the register with Sn command 5 14 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 AT Command Set and S Registers S Register Format S Registers can be displayed and or modified w
103. N NO ae eee a a MODEM waa LLL ELLE a LL EE LL EELS EEL x DIR PR MCI NUN IR MUR IS M RUN 6 POSITION PLUG PIN NO uut rtt TELEPHONE Qaa a ar ur ar gru a aan ar a a ur a E arr a a a n E nr ara y tutt utut a NDS 6 POSITION PLUG PIN NO annm nana m nut n nut un PHONE LINE al a a a UI at a a a ar al a an m ut ur n um at a uar am au ut m gar n a at n an LLL EL ELL ELE a a a a at 493 14173 Figure C 2 Wiring Diagram Y Cable for External Telephone C4 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Pin Assignments Dak Cc For 2 wire leased line connections to a JM8 network interface use an 8 position to 6 position crossover cable Figure C 3 according to the following FCC requirements The RJ series of jacks should not be used for connecting data equipment to nonswitched private line networks specifically the service equivalents of the pre divestiture Series 3002 Category II Tariff 260 service There is a substantial difference in transmit levels permitted in the private line service and those permitted in the public switched network The industry standard is now an 8 keyed modular jack known as the USOC JM8 Bellcore Technical Reference TR EOP 000242 Issue 1 released May 1985 When ordering the installation of the USOC JMS specify the appropriate wiring
104. No Dial Tone The modem has aborted the call because it cannot detect a dial tone No Quiet The modem has detected No Quiet Answer before the time out Answer setting of the No Answer Disconnect configuration option Ringback The answering modem did not answer within the time limit specified Timeout by the No Answer Timeout configuration option A ringback signal was detected Trunk Busy The modem is receiving a fast trunk busy Wrong Call The call was answered but not by a modem No answer tone Call Disconnect ATH Disconnect The modem has disconnected due to an ATH command Bad Lines Disc The modem has disconnected because the lines do not support the modulation and or data rate selected No Carrier Disc The modem disconnects due to the loss of carrier signal from the remote modem DTR Disconnect The modem has disconnected due to the loss of DTR from the DTE EC Disconnect The modem has disconnected due to failure to negotiate Error Control mode Inv Rate Disc When using V 32bis modulation the remote modem does not support the data rate used by the local modem LnCurrnt Disc The modem has disconnected due to the loss of line current LongSpace The modem has disconnected due to the detection of a long space Disc NoData Disc The modem has disconnected due to a lack of transmitted and received data Disconnecting The modem has begun the disconnect sequence
105. O Disables leased line operation amp L1 2 wire originate leased line operation amp L2 4 wire originate leased line operation amp L3 2 wire answer leased line operation amp L4 4 wire answer leased line operation The amp L command will cause the modem to reset before entering or exiting Leased Line mode Therefore it must be entered as the last command in an initialization string Table 5 3 4 of 8 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence amp Fn Select Factory Default Configuration Options Loads factory configuration Configure options into Active Operating area Factory amp FO Async Dial amp F1 Sync Dial amp F2 Sync Leased Answer amp F3 UNIX Dial amp F4 Sync Leased Originate amp F5 Async Leased Answer amp F6 Async Leased Originate amp F7 TMp Control amp F8 TMp Trib Only the amp FO and amp F3 commands will leave you AT Command mode The other commands will take you out of AT command control and place the modem into Dumb mode The only way to return to AT command control is via the diagnostic control panel DCP amp Gn V 22bis Guard Tone Configure Edit amp GO Disable Eee amp G1 550 Hz amp G2 1800 Hz NOTE The V 22bis Guard Tone cannot be disabled in some countries amp In Dial Transmit Level Configure Edit The AT command is amp In where nis Dial Line 0 for 1 dBm 1 for 1 dBm 32 for 32 dBm NOTE In North America the range of allowable
106. OFF DTR must then toggle OFF and then ON again for LSD to turn ON This setting is required for AT amp T DATAKIT dial out applications NOTE If LSD Control is set to DTR DiscOff then the DTR Action configuration option must be set to Stndrd RS232 The AT command for Forced On is amp CO The AT command for Standard RS232 is amp C1 The AT command for Wink When Disconnect is amp C2 The AT command for Follows DTR is amp C3 The AT command for Simulated Control Carrier is amp C4 The AT command for DTR Disconnect OFF is amp C5 4 16 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 1 8 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options TX Clock Source Internal Nxt Internal External RXC Loop This configuration option only appears if Async Sync Mode is configured for Sync Transmit Clock Source Determines the source of timing for synchronous data transmitted from the modem to the analog channel m Internal The transmit data s clock source is derived from the modem s internal clock This clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface m External The transmit data s clock source is provided by the DTE on Pin 24 XTXC on the EIA 232 D interface m Receive Clock Loop The modem s transmit clock is derived from its received analog signal The derived clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface The AT command for Internal is amp XO
107. ON and the RTS timer will start again m Disable The antistreaming function is not in effect m 10 sec 30 sec 1 min 2 min min 5 min Enables the antistreaming function and sets the maximum ON time for RTS before antistreaming control takes effect The AT command is S Register S72 n where n is 0 for Disable 1 for 10 sec 2 for 30 sec 3 for 1 min 4 for 2 min 5 for 3 min and 6 for 5 min 4 14 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 1 6 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options CTS Control Stndrd RS232 Nxt Stndrd RS232 Forced On WinkWhenDisc Follows Follows RTS40 Clear to Send Control CTS is a signal from the modem to the DTE indicating that it can accept data from the DTE m Standard RS232 In Synchronous mode forces the state of CTS to follow the state of RTS in normal EIA 232 D operation The minimum time that elapses between CTS and RTS is determined by the RTS CTS Delay configuration option Use this setting for most synchronous applications In AT Command mode CTS goes low just prior to DSR going active and goes high when the modem enters Data mode This operation prevents losing data in applications which begin transmitting as soon as DSR and CTS are both active m Forced On CTS is forced ON at all times Use this selection for most asynchronous applications Wink When Disconnect CTS is normally forced ON but is turned OFF for 1 to 2 seconds upon a disconnect U
108. R ON and turns DTR OFF when the DTE cannot accept a call NOTE This configuration option should only be used when the modem is located behind a user s Private Branch Exchange PBX For 3911 modems the Make Busy Network Interface Modules NIMs must be installed on the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual The AT command is S Register S69 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 29 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Dial Line The Dial Line configuration options are used to configure the modem for operation over dial lines Table 4 4 shows each Dial Line configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 4 4 1 of 3 Dial Line Configuration Options Dial Line Rate 19200 V32t Nxt 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b 2400 V22bis 1200 V22 1200 212A 0 300 V21 0 300 103J 1200 75 V23 75 1200 V23 600 75 V23 75 600 V23 Dial Line Rate This configuration option determines the modem s data rate and modulation scheme for operation on dial lines Online changes do no
109. Remote Operation which follows the descriptions of multipoint cloning operations 3 36 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Clone Remote in Broadcast Configurations A tributary modem configured for extended diagnostics Diagnostic Connection configuration option set to Modem DC can perform two types of Remote Clone operations It can clone the upstream VF connected control modem SC Clone or it can clone all the 391x modems attached to its downstream Diagnostic Channel DC Broadcast Choose DLL Type ZN SC Clone A EE From the Choose DLL Type screen press the F1 key to select SC_Clone to request the transfer of an exact copy of the tributary modem s firmware to the VF connected control modem Proceed to the section titled Implementing a Clone Remote Operation which follows the descriptions of multipoint cloning operations Cloning DC Broadcast Remote Before using Clone Remote in DC Broadcast configurations make sure the tributary modem s active poll list contains all the network management addresses for the control modems that receive the download refer to the Poll List section in this chapter and ensure that the control modems are responding properly to polls refer to the Sub Network Health and Status Branch sections in this chapter Choose DLL Type A DC Broadcast A PERLE From the Choose DLL Type screen press the gt key until DC_Broa
110. S Weight 2 5 pounds 1 14 kg Model 3910 without power supply 1 0 pounds 0 45 kg Model 3911 Height 2 1 inches 5 4 cm Model 3910 7 1 inches 18 1 cm Model 3911 Width 7 6 inches 19 4 cm Model 3910 0 9 inches 2 3 cm Model 3911 Depth 12 1 inches 30 8 cm Model 3910 13 4 inches 34 0 cm Model 3911 TRANSMIT LEVEL Leased Line North America Leased Line All Other Countries Dial Line North America Dial Line All Other Countries 0 through 15 dBm in 1 dBm decrements Factory default is 0 dBm 0 through 15 dBm in 1 dBm decrements Factory default is country dependent 10 through 32 dBm in 1 dBm decrements Factory default is Permissive 9 dBm Level setting is not accessible to the user Factory default is country dependent TELEPHONE INTERFACE Leased Line Connectivity Dial Line Connectivity 8 Model 3910 50 pin mass termination Model 3911 RJ11C Permissive RJ21X Permissive 50 pin connector Model 3911 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 1 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 1 1 3 of 3 Technical Specifications for 391x Series Modems Specifications Description DATA RATES Leased Line 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 bps Dial Line 19200 16800 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 600 300 bps ERROR CONTROL CCITT V 42 MNP 4 2 DATA COMPRESSION CCITT V 42bis MNP Class 5 1 10 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30
111. TRANSMITTER RECEIVER LOCAL MODEM REMOTE MODEM 491 13075 Figure 3 9 End to End Pattern Test To access Pattern from the Test branch make the following selections Test e amp A Gc 8 5 Press the gt key until Pattern appears Select Pattern to start this test Test Pattern gt A BlksErrd2xxxxxxx A ri fre rs gt 3 52 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation BlksErrd xxxxxxx displays the number of blocks of data found in error block size is 1000 bits per block BIksRcevd xxxxxxx displays the total number of blocks of data received The message NoSync appears as a value for BlksErrd while the modem s receiver is synchronizing The message OvrFlw appears as the value for BlksErrd if the counter overflows Press the key to display BIksRcvd xxxxxxx number of blocks of data received The Pattern test can be exited and reentered without restarting the test The BlksErrd and BlksRcvd continue counting If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the test If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to the Test section in Chapter 4 To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Sub Network Health and Status Branch The Sub Network Health an
112. The AT command for External is amp X1 The AT command for RXC Loop is amp X2 Bakup TXCIk Src Internal Nxt Internal External RXC Loop This configuration option only appears in customized installations in which the Dual Leased Ln is configured for Enable and Async Sync Mode is Sync Backup Transmit Clock Source Selects the clock reference source when operating in the Dual Leased Line Mode This is a special mode in which one leased line is used to back up another m Internal The transmit data s clock source is derived from the modem s internal clock This clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface m External The transmit data s clock source is provided by the DTE on Pin 24 XTXC on the EIA 232 D interface m Receive Clock Loop The modem s transmit clock is derived from its received analog signal The derived clock is available as an output on Pin 15 TXC of the EIA 232 D interface XTXC Clamps TXC Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option only appears if TX Clock Source is configured for External External Transmit Clock Clamps Transmit Clock Allows the modem s TXC output Pin 15 on the EIA 232 D interface to be clamped OFF when TX Clock Source is configured for External m Enable TXC is clamped off when TX Clock Source is configured for External m Disable TXC continues to be provided when TX Clock Source is configured for External The AT command is S Register S7
113. V 25bis New Line N A N A N A N A N A N A Character 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 F 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems DTR Table F 1 3 of 7 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial Bollea 9 Default Default Default Default Default Default P Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Line Dialer Auto Answer 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ring Count Dialer Type Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Tone Dial Tone Detect Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Blind Dial Pause N A N A N A N A N A N A Busy Tone Detect Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Pause Time 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec No Answer 45 sec 45 sec 45 sec 45 sec 45 sec 45 sec Timeout Fast Disconnect Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Enable Line Current Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disconnect 2 gt 8 msec gt 8 msec gt 8 msec gt 8 msec gt 8 msec gt 8 msec Long Space Enable Enable Enable Enable Enable Disable Disconnect No Carrier 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec 2 sec Disconnect No Data Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disconnect Auto Make Busy Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable 3911 only Make Busy via Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Dial Line Dial Line Rate V 32bis Automode V 32bis Autorate V 32bis Override Dial Transmit Level 3 V 22bis Guard Tone V 32bis Train 19200 V32t Ena
114. a 4 pin modular connector NMS for network management and a DB 25 S DTE connector Carrier Mounted Model 3911 4 Wire 2 Wire Modem The carrier mounted Model 3911 modem Figure 1 2 is capable of either 4 wire 2 wire leased line or dial operation and installs into COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier The 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 1 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Model 3911 s faceplate has 16 LED status indicators for displaying modem activity and an audio speaker jack for the carrier s optional speaker The Model 3911 modem s rear has two edge card connectors that mount into a connector plate located on the rear of the carrier This connector plate has two DB 25 S connectors one providing an EIA 232 D DTE interface and one for future functionality FACEPLATE Status Pwr Alrm 142 Test O Dial BACK 125 RI CONNECTOR Busy PLATE Em EIA232 V 24 Osa 9 CONNECTOR EIA232 V 24 EDGE CARD CONNECTOR 103 104 NE 105 106 107 108 109 EIA232 V 24 OOOOOOOOOOOO GROUNDING TAB FUTURE USE E Front Panel Ow FUTURE USE RS366A V 25 3800 0000000000000 OOOOOOOOOOOO V 35 36983500 o 496 14178b Figure 1 2 Model 3911 The Model 3911 derives ac power from the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier s backplane which is a common bus to all devices installed in the carri
115. a continuous spacing condition sent from the remote modem before it goes on hook Issuing a long space is one method of disconnecting a call m Enable Modem disconnects if it receives a continuous space from the DTE For modulations lower than 4800 bps the modem s transmitter will transmit 4 seconds of long space upon a disconnect m Disable Modem does not disconnect if it receives a continuous space from the DTE Modem will not transmit a long space disconnect The AT command for Disable is YO The AT command for Enable is Y1 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 27 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 3 4 of 5 Line Dialer Configuration Options No Carrier Disc 2sec Nxt 2sec Disable 5sec 10sec 20sec No Carrier Disconnect If the modem no longer receives carrier from the remote modem it disconnects the call This configuration option determines how long carrier is OFF before the modem disconnects Loss of carrier is one method of disconnecting a call m 2 5 10 20 sec Modem disconnects if carrier turns OFF for more than 2 seconds 5 seconds 10 seconds or 20 seconds m Disable Modem does not disconnect if carrier turns OFF NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries The AT command is S Register S10 n where n is 255 for Disable or 0 to 254 in 0 1 second increments for Enable No Data Disc Disable Nxt Disable 10min 30min 60min No Data Disconnect Forces the modem t
116. a used to view and change configuration options from the DCP The edit area can be loaded from one of five configuration option areas Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 or Factory Electronic Industries Association This organization provides standards for the data communications industry An Electronic Industries Association s standard defining the 25 position interface between data terminal equipment and data communications equipment An Electronic Industries Association s standard defining the 25 position interface between data terminal equipment and data communications automatic calling equipment An algorithm used to correct data transmission errors Default setting is This sequence lets you switch your modem from Data mode to Command mode See extended network 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 GL 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems extended network extended result codes fallback FCC Forward Error Correction FEC Front End Processor FEP full duplex function key half duplex handshaking HDLC host Hz idle JM8 keypad LCD The extension of a circuit where the tributary DCE is connected to a downstream extended control DCE An asynchronous message in either numbers or words that includes VF data rate and error control information the modem sends to the DTE after executing or trying to execute a command Retraining at a lower rate or speed Fed
117. able 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable Configure Edit Leased Line S84 AT Command Mode Register determines how the modem responds to valid and invalid AT commands Register has the following values 0 Normal 1 No ERROR 2 No Strap or ERROR The factory setting is Normal Configure WEdit DTE Dialer S85 Fast Disconnect Register allows the modem to disconnect immediately after receiving a disconnect command from a local DTE or its own diagnostic control panel Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable Configure Edit Line Dialer S88 Straps When Disconnected Register determines whether or not configuration options in the Active Saved configuration area are reloaded to Active Operating when a disconnect occurs Register has the following values 0 or 231 No Change 1 or 232 Reload The factory setting is No Change Configure Edit Misc 5 24 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 4 11 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S89 V 42 Automatic Request for Retransmission ARQ Window Size Increase Register allows the ARQ window size to be set to a value from six frames to fifteen frames For best performance this register should remain at its default setting of six frames ATS89 0 The only reason to
118. able Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Command Character Echo Controls whether or not characters are echoed back to the DTE when the modem is in Command mode The AT command for Disable is EO The AT command for Enable is E1 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 21 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 2 3 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options CarriageRtn Char 013 ASCI Nxt 013 ASCI This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Carriage Return Character Allows you to change the ASCII character used to terminate an AT command to any ASCII value from 0 to 127 The AT command is S Register S3 n where n is a value from 0 to 127 Backspace Char 008 ASCI Nxt 008 ASCI This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Backspace Character Sets the character used to perform a backspace in Command mode The AT command is S Register S5 n where n is a value from 0 to 127 Linefeed Char 010 ASCI Nxt 010 ASCI This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Line Feed Character Sets the character used to perform a line feed in Command mode for responses from the modem The AT command is S Register S4 n where n is a value from 0 to 127 Result Codes Enable Nxt Enable Disable EnablelnOrig This configuration option only appears if
119. ailed either the Dial Tone Detection or the Ring Tone Detection portion of the Call Test command 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 17 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 3 6 2 of 2 Health and Status Messages Type Message Indicates Dial Make Busy Mode The modem is in a Make Busy condition Service Line Model 3911 only The modem installed in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has been switched to a service line Short Hold Time The modem s dial hold time has been shortened Non Answering The modem is in a non answering mode Thresh RSL High The received signal level RSL has exceeded the upper threshold Threshd RSL Low The RSL is less than the lower threshold Threshld SNR Threshold The signal to noise ratio has exceeded the threshold Non linear Dist The non linear distortion has exceeded the threshold Retrains The number of retrains has exceeded the threshold Signal Quality The signal quality is less than the threshold Far Echo Threshd The far end echo level has exceeded the threshold Near Echo Thresh The near end echo level has exceeded the threshold Security Database Reset The security database has been reset passwords erased Password Protect Security password protection has been enabled Mode Change There has been a change in security mode Refer to Chapter 6 Dial Access Security Pops A security password has been changed Database Change The sec
120. ailure status messages Table 3 3 Disconnect For dial backup applications use this function when you want to disconnect an established call on a dial line For leased backup applications use this function to switch between the primary leased line and the backup leased line To access Disconnect from the Call Setup branch make the following selection Call Setup gt A Dial Disconnect A Select Disconnect Disconnect a ET nen A L8 L8 3 56 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation For dial backup applications the modem goes on hook hangs up and the call is disconnected The Command Complete status message appears To exit this function and remain in the Call Setup branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press 2 key Answer For dial backup applications Answer allows the modem to go off hook generate an answer tone and begin the handshaking process with the calling modem Use the Answer function when the Auto Answer Ring Count configuration option is disabled Refer to the Line Dialer section in Chapter 4 For leased backup applications Answer allows the modem to begin the handshaking process with the remote modem To access Answer from the Call Setup branch make the following selections Call Setup A Answer ES Press the key until Answer appears Select Answe
121. aits before abandoning a call when no answer Line Dialer tone is received Enter a value from 1 255 seconds The factory setting is 45 S8 Pause Time for the Dial Modifier Register determines how long in Configure Edit seconds the modem pauses when it encounters a comma in the Line Dialer Dial command string Enter a value from 0 255 seconds The factory setting is 2 10 No Carrier Disconnect Register determines how long in tenths of Configure WEdit seconds the modem allows the carrier signal to be OFF before Line Dialer disconnecting the call Enter a value from 0 254 in 0 1 second increments A value of 255 disables this register The factory setting is 20 2 seconds 12 Escape Guard Time Register sets the value in 20 millisecond Configure Edit increments for the required pause before and after the escape DTE Dialer sequence is issued The guard time prevents the modem from interpreting data as the escape sequence characters Enter a value from 0 255 in 20 millisecond increments The factory setting of 50 equals 1000 milliseconds or one second 18 Test Time out Register sets the duration in seconds for the modem Configure Edit tests This automatically cancels any test in progress after the time of Tests this register expires Any test can be manually canceled by issuing the escape sequence followed by the amp TO command Enter a value from 0 255 seconds A value of 0 disables this register The
122. al string can be included to enhance readability Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability DS n Dial Stored Number Dials the number stored in Location n 1 24 To Call Setup Dial store a telephone number refer to the amp Zn x command Dial Directory En Command Character Echo Configure Edit EO Disables echo to the DTE DTE Dialer E1 Enables echo to the DTE Hn Hook Switch Control HO Call Setup HO Modem goes on hook ciun d or H1 Modem goes off hook MO ASNO Make Busy H1 Control Make Busy In Identification Status Identity 10 Displays product code 144 I1 Displays 3 digit firmware revision number 12 Performs an EPROM check Ln Speaker Volume Control Speaker LO Selects low volume L1 Selects low volume ee L2 Selects medium volume L3 Selects high volume Mn Speaker On Off Control Speaker MO Speaker always OFF M1 Speaker ON until carrier signal is detected Ie M2 Speaker always ON 5 6 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 2 3 of 3 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Description Command Sequence Return to Online or Data Mode Returns modem to Data mode from None Online Command mode P Pulse Dial Sets the modem for Pulse Dial mode Configure Edit Line Dialer NOTE Pulse Mode is disa
123. alid Ranges for VF Thresholds 3 45 3 9 Valid Dial Command Modifiers es 22 29 lt 3 61 4 1 DTE Interface Configuration Options ecce eme tenerse etn 4 10 4 2 DTE Dialer Contiguration Option endete tetra stom ee dei ete 4 20 4 3 Line Dialer Configuration Options ose terere echo te eee ded 4 25 4 4 Dial Line Configuration Options oe bee cea dee Reed 4 30 4 5 Leased Line Configuration Options sceri 4 33 4 6 V42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options 4 39 4 7 Test Contisuration 4 46 4 8 Miscellaneous Configuration Options 0 0 eee 4 48 Dall 5 3 9 27 S39 x senes Al Commands bem os be ay iw Pte peque 5 5 5 3 SOIR Series S REgIBUeES REEL EROR ET do hae baa eee 5 15 6 1 Edit Password Table Group Options 0 2 0 0 eee eee ee eee eee 6 8 6 2 Set Answer Security Group Options lesser ele eee ee ee eds 6 10 6 3 Set Originate Security Group Options 0 0 eee eee eee eee 6 11 6 4 Security Configuration Options lt er essere ere RR aR es 6 14 6 5 Security Database Table Using VF Side Passwords 6 18 6 6 Security Database Table Using DTE Side Passwords 6 18 6 7 Security Database Table Using Both VF Side
124. and DTE Side Passwords 6 19 Bel Modem Health gt mech ES beg uU eR sue Rs B 1 B 2 Leased Line Operation deeem iet e He Se e nm B 2 B 3 Dial Backup Operation aevo edu ee erm a ence p NN B 2 B 4 Modem DTE erre ia B 3 B 5 Modem VF Connection eere See B 4 B 6 Online Operanion oce tren nere ditare tee e ir e eee B 5 C l BlA 232 D Pin Assignments leere beet ect eden etin C 2 C 2 VF Connector Pin Assignments ecce pede ee DR ee C 3 Del MesbistCommands gsnrvcesxteesb uei dha snide ees oo wits VIN PEE D 7 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 v COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table D 2 E 1 F 1 Page 29018 Response Messagesu cnet lese tU eer E Qe UU ERR UE PE RU REPE UE D 8 ASCH Characters is eos oe temor tee cased whee page eee eee Ip E 1 Factory Default Configuration Options 0 0 0 eee ee eee eia F 2 vi November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Preface Objectives and Reader Assumptions This manual describes how to install and operate the COMSPHERE 391x Series standalone and carrier mounted modems This manual assumes that you have a basic understanding of modems and their operation How to Use this Manual Chapter 1 provides technical specifications information about the 391x Series modems features and the government requirem
125. and the message Command Complete appears on the LCD Download Software The Download Software function sets parameters within the modem when transferring firmware to one or more modems or when receiving firmware upgrades from a locally attached PC based controller The latter is only performed by customer service personnel There are two selections under Download Software Clone Remote and To Local via DTE Clone Remote is used to transfer an exact copy of the firmware currently stored in a 391x Series modem to either one or more remote 391x Series modems or one or more DC attached 391x Series modems Remote modems must be connected to the local modem via a leased line network or an established dial line network If these prerequisites do not exist Clone Remote will not appear on the LCD The second selection appearing on the LCD is To Local via DTE This function permits firmware upgrades to be transferred to a 391x Series modem This type of download requires a locally attached PC controller to be connected to the modem s DTE port as well as special download software Any downloads using this selection are intended to be performed by customer service personnel only 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 35 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Selecting Clone Remote NOTE Clone Remote operations are not supported unless both local and remote modems are 391x Series modems The 3800 or 392x Series modems cannot be used in cloning operatio
126. apter 002 0025 0031 Figure G 4 Sample Configuration Point to Point with Network Management Configuration Options 3910A Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options 3910 B Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options Cables Cable 1 Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTE1 Cable 2 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Cable 4 Use part number 835 1224 1011 10 feet part number 125 0040 0031 12 feet part number 835 1224 2511 25 feet part number 835 1224 5011 50 feet or an equivalent pin to pin 6 position 6 wire modular cord The maximum cable length is 50 feet 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 G 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Carrier with Network Management Figure G 5 shows a sample configuration for COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier applications with network management 19200 V32t 19200 V32t TX TX DTE i Leased 5 B Sync Cable 1 Sak Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 ard cc IN COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier NMS M Cable 4 6700 or 6800 m Adapter 002 0025 0031 Figure G 5 Sample Configuration Carrier with Netw
127. apter 4 for configuration options Except for dialing ring indication and call progression functions you control the backup function as if it were a normal dial backup COMSPHERE 391 x Series Models The 391x Series family is available in two models the Model 3910 a 4 wire 2 wire standalone modem and the Model 3911 a carrier mounted version of the standalone unit Both models offer a variety of modulation schemes and network enhancements while still providing reliable high speed data transmission using the latest in modem technology 1 2 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Introduction Standalone Model 3910 4 Wire 2 Wire Modem The standalone Model 3910 modem Figure 1 1 is capable of either 4 wire 2 wire leased line or dial operation The modem is controlled using either AT commands or the diagnostic control panel DCP The DCP consists of a liquid crystal display LCD three function keys four directional keys and a row of 13 LED status indicators For a better understanding of DCP operation refer to Chapter 3 DCP Operation DIAGNOSTIC CONTROL LCD AND Ji 7 POWER SUPPLY STATUS INDICATORS POWER POWER ON OFF POWER IN 496 14160 03 Figure 1 1 Model 3910 The rear of the modem contains an ON OFF power switch a low voltage dc power connector an 8 pin modular connector LEASED for leased line connection an 8 pin modular connector DIAL for dial line or leased line backup
128. ar end echo level far end echo level far end echo delay and echo frequency offset If the modem is not receiving a signal the message No Signal appears on the LCD SigQual RevLevel Sig Noise NrEchLvl FarEchLvl FarEchDel EchoFreqOff Signal Quality displays the condition of the VF line Possible values are Excelent Excellent Good Fair Poor or No Signal These values appear for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations Receive Signal Level displays in decibels referenced to one milliwatt dBm the actual strength of the incoming signal This value appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 and Trellis Multipoint modulations Signal to Noise Ratio displays in decibels the receive signal strength relative to noise on the line This value appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 and Trellis Multipoint modulations Near End Echo Level displays the signal level in decibels referenced to one milliwatt dBm of that portion of the transmit signal which has been echoed back by the local line termination This value appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations Far End Echo Level displays the signal level in decibels referenced to one milliwatt dBm of that portion of the transmit signal which has been echoed back by the remote line termination This value appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations Far End Echo Delay displays the roundtrip delay in milliseconds of the far end echo This value appea
129. ata bits parity and stop bits is set to the same value in both modems Data is missing during a transfer Verify that you are using the same method of flow control for both the modem and the DTE If using XON XOFF flow control verify that the modem s parity matches the DTE s parity 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 B 5 Overview Pin Assignments dr AM rm C 1 ELA 252 D Pin Assignments esu e here CERE OE C 2 VF Connector Pin Assignments eesi ese setate nho es donee C 3 Auxiliary Cables Not Supplied sae RI Ren C 4 This appendix lists E A 232 D and VF TELCO pin assignments and provides information about auxiliary cables which are not supplied 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 C 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems EIA 232 D Pin Assignments Table C 1 lists the EIA 232 D pin assignments for the modem Table C 1 EIA 232 D Pin Assignments Pin Name urne CCITT Ee Circuit Function 1 AA 101 Shield 2 TXD BA 103 DTE Transmit Data 3 RXD BB 104 DCE Receive Data 4 RTS CA 105 DTE Request to Send 5 CTS CB 106 DCE Clear to Send 6 DSR CC 107 DCE Data Set Ready 7 SG AB 102 Signal Ground 8 LSD CF 109 DCE Line Signal Detect 9 12V Reserved for test purposes may be used to drive one RS 232 load 10 12V Reserved for test purposes may be used to
130. ation OVERVIEW AL G 1 Ue N el dict od aic uaa eic cA RR G 2 Configutation OpLHonS esie ere br oer e eh CERT ae G 2 Cables ei o n RR eem IERE C OR E G 2 Multipoint DM CCP G 3 Coufisuradon e sea bated essa eget me G 3 Cables es patients ob aula alae aa eh pep eet pun A COE REGUM G 3 Point to Point with Automatic Dial G 4 Configuration AR ex ald G 4 Cables secs corosas teitt Ean RR REIR EG ST RG ee Hades G 4 Point to Point with Network G 5 Configuration OPRONS eoi bre RE wad Dacor eons G 5 Cables Obs GaSe ERE PSI SLRS Oe ees G 5 Carrier with Network Management G 6 Configutation ODHOIDS Jia ee erect oec de ee A G 6 Cables iie ee Ree ex ee e RE EXTR P G 6 Extended Multipoint 1 22 2 e RR eme ee eme G 7 Confisurat n OpHUOBS lt 2 sci a ee demere eek Ped G 8 CableS cense esee Seek oh sate eRe RRM eda COE RES G 8 Extended Diagnostics lee pain den Leesa aces G 9 Contigutamon eene d a riot 5 G 9 AE G 10 Adapter gic cscs oe ex ratae O EREE E RE EE eR Rs G 10 Overview This appendix provides diagrams of sample configurations for the 391x Series modems Following each diagram the appropriate configuration options and cables are listed
131. ators appear as one of the following symbols Right Scroll Indicator gt The right scroll indicator appears when more choices are available to the right of what is currently displayed on the LCD Left Right Scroll Indicator The left right scroll indicator appears when more choices are available to the left and right of what is currently displayed on the LCD Left Scroll Indicator The left scroll indicator appears when more choices are available to the left of what is currently displayed on the LCD Other indicators may turn on depending on existing conditions such as error detection informational alerts and warnings These indicators appear on the top or bottom line of the LCD Remote Mode Indicator 2 If the local 391x Series modem establishes a connection with the remote 391x Series modem via the Remote branch then d appears in the upper right corner of the LCD top line on both modems For more information on the Remote Mode indicator refer to Remote Branch in this chapter Out of Range Indicator If an invalid threshold out of range is selected in the VF Threshold update process then appears in the lower right corner of the LCD bottom line For more information on the Out of Range indicator refer to VF Threshold Update in this chapter The DCP on the Model 3910 has seven keys while the optional SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has eight keys The additional key on the carrier is the Select key us
132. be disabled and the modem ignores all busy tones The AT commands for Disable are X0 X1 and X2 The AT commands for Enable are X3 X4 X5 X6 and X7 Pause Time 2sec Nxt 2sec 4sec 6sec 8sec 10sec 20sec Pause Time Determines the number of seconds the modem pauses when it encounters a comma in the dial command string NOTE Although DCP selections are limited 2 4 6 8 10 or 20 values set by the AT commands can display from 0 to 255 seconds The AT command is S Register S8 n where n is from 0 to 255 in 1 second increments NoAnswer Timout 45sec Nxt 45sec 30sec 60sec 120sec No Answer Abort Time out Determines the number of seconds an originating modem waits before abandoning a call attempt when no answer tone is received NOTE Although DCP selections are limited 30 45 60 or 120 values set by AT commands can display from 1 to 255 seconds NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries The AT command is S Register S7 n where n is from 1 to 255 in 1 second increments 4 26 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 3 3 of 5 Line Dialer Configuration Options Fast Disconnect Disable Nxt Disable Enable Fast Disconnect Allows the modem to disconnect immediately after receiving a disconnect command from a local DTE or its own diagnostic control panel m Disable The modem follows its normal disconnect sequence by issuing a cleardown
133. be equal to the VF telephone line data rate m Disable The data rate of the connection between the DTE and modem is the value of the Async DTE Rate configuration option m Enable The data rate between the DTE and modem is the same as the modem s VF data rate As a result when the modem is in Data mode the speed of the data passed between the modem and DTE occurs at the VF data rate The AT command is S Register S90 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 4 18 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 1 10 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options Extend Main Ch Disable Nxt Disable Enable Primary data can only be extended one link Extend Main Channel This configuration option supports extended diagnostics Specifies whether there is main primary channel connectivity between the modem s DTE ports and the DTE ports of modems one level below downstream or above upstream in the diagnostic network m Enable If this configuration option is set to Enable on a port of a tributary modem test mode is propagated to the modems downstream when test mode goes ON for that port m Disable If this configuration option is set to Disable on a port of a tributary modem test mode is not propagated for that port and primary channel data is clamped when in test mode NOTE For an extended control modem this configuration option is used along with the upstream port number where the main pri
134. ber 1996 4 43 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 6 6 of 8 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Break Buffr Ctl Keep Data Nxt Keep Data Discard Data This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Break Buffer Control Determines if data stored in the modem s buffer is saved or discarded when the DTE issues a break sequence m Keep Data Nondestructive mode Saves the data in the buffer in both the local and remote modems m Discard Data Destructive mode Empties the data buffer Only buffers in the same direction of travel as the break are discarded NOTE This configuration option is ignored if the Break Forces Escape configuration option refer to the DTE Dialer configuration options group is enabled The AT commands for Discard Data are and K1 The AT commands for Keep Data are K2 K4 and K5 Send Break Cntl Data First End Data First Break First This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for DirectMode Send Break Control Determines what is sent from the modem first data or break if a break sequence is sent from the DTE m Data First Nonexpedited A break is treated as a data character and is sent in the order it was received This is also known as Nonexpedited mode m Break First Expedited A break is sent
135. blank directory appears on the LCD The cursor _ always appears in the first character position Select F2 f or F3 until the desired character is selected This can be an alpha or numeric character Press the gt key to move the cursor to the next character position Continue this key sequence until the dial command modifiers and telephone number are entered Refer to Table 3 6 for a list of valid dial command modifiers 01 9W5556789 ene t GS L8 8 To save number just entered scroll to next directory location by selecting Nxt The number is now stored in nonvolatile memory Table 3 9 describes what can be entered in directory locations 3 60 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Table 3 9 Valid Dial Command Modifiers Dial command modifiers are parameters entered in the dial command string which specify how when and what number to dial The following is a list of parameters the 391x Series modems recognize T Tone DTMF dial Any digit 0 9 or can be dialed as tone P Pulse dial Only the digits 0 9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode NOTE Once a dialing method tone or pulse has been specified it will only remain active until the end of that dial string The modem defaults to the value set by the Dialer Type configuration option Pause Causes the modem to pause before processing the next character the dia
136. ble Enable Disable Permissive 9 dBm Disable Long 19200 V32t Enable Enable Disable Permissive 9 dBm Disable Long 19200 V32t Enable Enable N A Permissive 9 dBm Disable Long 19200 V32t Enable Enable Disable Permissive 9 dBm Disable Long 19200 V32t Enable Enable Disable Permissive 9 dBm Disable Long 19200 V32t Enable Enable Disable Permissive 9 dBm Disable Long 1 This configuration option is country dependent This configuration option does not appear on Models 3910 A1 401 and 3911 B1 001 3 Except in North America this configuration option is not changed by loading factory default configuration options F 4 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Default Configuration Options Table F 1 4 of 7 Factory Default Configuration Options i Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial Len Default Default Default Default Default Default Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Leased Line Leased Mode 4 wire LL 4 wire LL 4 wire LL N A N A N A Answer Sync Answer Async Originate TMp Leased Answ Leased Answ Tributary or or 4 wire LL or 4 wire LL 4 wire LL Originate Sync Originate Answer TMp Leased Orig Async Leased Control Orig Leased Line Rate 19200 V32t 19200 V32t 19200 TMp N A N A N A TMp Control or 14400 TM
137. ble Nxt Disable Enable Disab amp Switch This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for V42 MNPorBfr MNP or Buffr or or Bufr Error Control Negotiate Buffer Determines if the answering modem buffers the data that it received from the remote modem during an interval in which the modem attempts to establish a connection using error control Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs m Disable Data is not buffered during the link negotiating handshaking sequence m Enable Data is buffered while the link is being established Initialization data is not passed on the DTE during the handshaking sequence m Disable and Switch Data is not buffered during the handshaking sequence However when the modem receives an error control fallback character it switches to Buffer mode Refer to the EC Fallback Char configuration option The AT command for Disable is CO The AT command for Enable is C1 The AT command for Disab amp Switch is C2 EC Fallbck Char 013 ASCI Nxt 013 ASCI This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and EC Negotiate Buffer is not configured for Disable Error Control Fallback Character This configuration option allows you to enter the ASCII value of the error control fallback character This provides the remote modem with the ability to end the error control link
138. bled in Denmark and Sweden Table 5 3 1 of 8 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence Qn Result Codes Configure Edit Q0 Enables modem to send result codes to the DTE DTE Dialer Q1 Disables modem from sending result codes to the DTE Q2 Enables in Originate mode only for modem to send result codes to the DTE Required for most UNIX applications Sn r Change S Register Changes contents of S Register where n is the None S Register and r is the new value Sn Display S Register Displays value of S Register where n is the None S Register number T Tone Dial Sets the modem for tone dial mode Configure WEdit Line Dialer Vn Result Codes Format Configure WEdit DTE Dialer VO Displays result codes in Number 1 format digits V1 Displays result codes as text V2 Displays result codes in Number 2 format digits 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 5 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 3 2 of 8 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence Xn Extended Result Code Dial Tone Detect and Busy Tone Detect Extended Configuration Options Result Code Configure WEdit Extended Dial Tone Busy Tone Result Code Detect Detect RTE praler re Dial Tone X0 Disable Disable isable Enable Disable Disable Detect 2 Enable Enable Disable Configure Edit Enable Disable Enable Line Dialer X4 Enable Enable Enable X5 Add
139. c application A user defined configuration area containing customized configuration options for a specific application A continuous frequency signal that can be modulated by another signal that contains information to be transmitted The elimination of empty fields redundancies and gaps in order to reduce storage capacity needs and the amount of data to be transmitted Anything that is eliminated is restored after the data is received One of two modem operating modes When in Data mode the modem transmits and receives data instead of accepting commands A 25 pin connector that is used to connect a cable which enables communication between two devices A decibel referenced to one milliwatt This unit measures relative signal power The equipment Data Communications Equipment or Data Circuit Terminating Equipment that provides the functions required to establish maintain and end a connection This equipment also provides the signal conversion required for communication between the DTE and the telephone line Diagnostic Control Panel The face of the modem that continuously provides status information about the modem s operation and allows an operator to manage its operation This is a generic term used for both the standalone and carrier mounted models See SDCP The process of recovering data from a modulated carrier wave Device Health and Status A detailed account of device alarms The diagnostic interface between tw
140. ce XTXC Clamps N A N A N A N A N A N A TXC CT111 Rate Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Control DTE Rate VF N A Disable N A Disable Disable N A Extend Main Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Channel Upstream Port Porti Port1 Port1 Porti Porti Port1 1 This configuration option is country dependent F 2 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Default Configuration Options Table F 1 2 of 7 Factory Default Configuration Options r Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial en Default Default Default Default Default Default P Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings DTE Dialer DTE Dialer Type Disable AT Disable AT AT Disable AT Escape N A 043 ASCII N A 043 ASCII 043 ASCII N A Character Escape Guard N A 1 sec N A 1 sec 1 sec N A Time Break Forces N A Disable N A Disable Disable N A Escape Command N A Enable N A Enable Enable N A Character Echo Carriage Return N A 013 ASCII N A 013 ASCII 013 ASCII N A Character Backspace N A 008 ASCII N A 008 ASCII 008 ASCII N A Character Linefeed N A 010 ASCII N A 010 ASCII 010 ASCII N A Character Result Codes N A Enable N A Enable Enable In N A Originate Extended Result N A Enable N A Enable Enable N A Codes Result Codes N A Words N A Words Words N A Format AT Command N A Normal N A Normal Normal N A Mode V 25bis Coding N A N A N A N A N A N A V 25bis Idle Fill N A N A N A N A N A N A
141. change it is for satellite delays Register has the following values 0 six frames 1 seven frames 2 eight frames 3 nine frames 4 ten frames 5 eleven frames 6 twelve frames 7 thirteen frames 8 fourteen frames 9 fifteen frames The factory setting is O six frames This command only applies when the modem connects using V 42bis data compression or V 42 error control If the modem is configured for Direct mode MNP mode Buffer mode or Synchronous operation this command is invalid This command does not have a front panel equivalent S90 DTE Rate VF Register allows the DTE s data rate to be equal to the Configure Edit VF telephone line data rate If Enabled the data rate between the DTE Interface DTE and modem is the same as the modem s VF data rate As a result when the modem is in Data mode the speed of the data passed between the modem and DTE occurs at the VF data rate Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 91 Cellular Enhancement Register allows the modem to use Configure Edit non standard techniques to enhance V 42 operation for cellular V42 MNP Buffer applications It is still compatible however with modems which do not have the cellular enhancement implemented or enabled Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 5 25 COMSPHERE 3900
142. control at 2 4 kbps tributaries at 2 4 kbps Tributary rates will never exceed control rates If tributary and control rates are equal reducing the control rate automatically reduces the tributary rate 2400 V22bis This modulation scheme is available on 2 wire and 4 wire leased lines 14400 V33 12000 V33 These modulation schemes are only available on 4 wire leased lines 9600 V29 7200 V29 4800 V29 These modulation schemes are only available on 4 wire leased lines 4800 V27bis 2400 V27bis This modulation scheme is available on 2 wire half duplex and 4 wire leased lines NOTE It is recommended that both modems use the same fixed data rate NOTE The modem must be in Direct mode before the modulation scheme can be changed from V 32bis to another leased line modulation V 33 V 29 or V 22bis See Err Contrl Mode configuration option for more about Direct mode On leased lines V 42 error control and Buffer mode are only supported by V 32bis An error occurs if the modem is not in Direct mode when the modulation is changed from V 32bis The AT command is S Register S44 n where n is 1 14 400 V 32bis 12 2 12 000 V 33 19 16 800 V 32 terbo 2 12 000 V 32bis 13 9600 V 29 20 19 200 TMp 3 9600 V 32bis 14 7200 V 29 21 14 400 TMp 4 7200 V 32bis 15 4800 V 29 22 9600 TMp 5 4800 V 32bis 16 4800 V 27bis 23 7200 TMp 6 2400 V 22bis 17 2400 V 27bis 24 4800 TMp 11
143. d Answer Originate TMp Control Trib Async Dial Sync Dial UNIX Dial Load Edit Area From EDIT AREA ALLOWS YOU TO VIEW AND EDIT CONFIGURATION OPTIONS ANY CHANGES MADE TO CONFIGURATION OPTIONS ARE SAVED TO Active Saved Customer1 OR Customer2 Figure 4 1 DCP Configuration Process 4 2 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Active Saved Customer1 Customer2 ATZO ATZ3 ATZ1 ATZ2 Sync Sync Dial Leased AT amp F1 Answer Sync Leased AT amp F2 Originate AT amp F4 Leased Async Leased Answer Originate AT amp F5 AT amp F6 TMp TMp Trib Control AT amp F8 AT amp F7 UNIX Dial Async Dial AT amp F3 AT amp FO LOAD Active Operating USING ATZ OR AT amp F COMMAND NOTE ON POWER UP Active Saved IS LOADED TO Active Operating Active Operating CHANGES MADE USING ANY AT COMMAND IMMEDIATELY AFFECT MODEM OPERATION USE AT amp W COMMAND TO SAVE CHANGES TO Active Saved Customer1 OR Customer2 NOTE THE AT amp W COMMAND IS DISABLED IF THE Straps When Disconnected CONFIGURATION OPTION IS SET TO Reload Active Saved Customer1 Customer2 AT amp WO AT amp W1 AT amp W2 Figure 4 2 AT Command Configuration Process 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Configure Branch The Configure branch of the Top Level menu contains all of the modem s configuration options strap
144. d increments Max Frame Size 256 Nxt 256 192 128 64 32 16 This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is not configured for BufferMode or DirectMode Maximum Frame Size Sets the maximum frame size for V 42 and MNP For V 42 operation 128 is the maximum value Any value which exceeds this will automatically default to 128 for V 42 For MNP operation 64 is the minimum value Any value less than that will automatically default to 64 For cellular applications at least one of the sides should be set to a low value A setting of 32 is recommended Only one modem needs this setting both modems will automatically default to the greatest common value The AT Command for 256 is The AT Command for 192 is A2 The AT Command for 128 is A1 The AT Command for 64 is VAO The AT Command for 32 is A4 The AT Command for 16 is A5 CellularEnhance Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for V42 MNPorBfr V42 MNPorDsc LAPM or Disc or or Bulfr Cellular Enhancement When enabled the modem uses non standard techniques to enhance V 42 operation for cellular applications It is still compatible however with modems which do not have the cellular enhancement implemented or enabled The AT command is S Register S91 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for
145. d Bell 103J The 391x Series modem does not support other vendors proprietary modulation schemes Force your modem to operate at the same modulation scheme as the originating modem to see if they connect The Originate Mode does not function properly Verify that the modem s DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to the correct setting either AT DTR Dialing V 25bis Async V 25bis Bisync or V 25bis HDLC Refer to DTE Dialer in Chapter 4 The modem does not go off hook and begin dialing If using AT Dialing refer to the Table B 2 Modem DTE Connection If using DTR Dialing verify the telephone number stored in directory location 1 and verify that the DTE is raising DTR from Off to ON to initiate a dial If using V 25bis Async verify that the correct character format is set to 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit and the carriage return and line feed are used as command terminators If using V 25bis Bisync verify that the correct character format uses two synchronous control characters and a start of text control character before the text block and an end of text control character after the text block If using V 25bis HDLC verify that the character format uses flag address and control characters before the text block and a frame sequence check and flag after the text block B 4 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Troubleshooting Table B 5 2 of 2 Modem VF Connection
146. d Status SubHS function is not available on multipoint tributary modems or with certain modulations V 29 V 33 V 22bis and V 27bis The SubHS branch of the Top Level menu allows you to display alarm conditions in downstream modems To access the SubHS branch from the Top Level menu make the following selections Leased 19 2 A Test m A Press the key until SubHS appears Select SubHS NOTE If there are no modems in the multipoint poll list the message Poll List Empty appears on the second line of the LCD 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 53 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Sub network HS A li XXX yyyyyy A Em When you select SubHS XXX Displays the network management address of the downstream modem selected yyyyyy Displays the status of the downstream modem This message is updated every several seconds to display the latest status MAJOR MINOR and STATUS display Health and Status alarm conditions refer to Table 3 6 in the Device Health and Status DeviceHS section of this chapter for additional information UNKNWN appears when the modem does not recognize the downstream health and status information or device communication is not established Normal appears if no alarms are present NO RSP appears when the downstream modem does not respond to the poll Select Nxt to scroll through the entries in the poll lists To exit this function and retu
147. d call system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 International call 813 530 2340 Trademarks products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners ED Printed on recycled paper COPYRIGHT 1996 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Avenue North P O Box 2826 Largo Florida 33779 2826 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes A November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Safety Instructions Important Safety Instructions 1 Read and follow all warning no
148. d in a variety of applications and environments while also allowing control over modem configuration dialing and diagnostics The 391x Series modems offer preset factory configurations containing the most often used modem settings The 391x Series modems have a wide variety of features Four wire two wire point to point or four wire multipoint operation Four wire two wire leased line modulations V 32 terbo 19200 and 16800 bps V 32bis 14400 12000 9600 7200 and 4800 bps V 32 9600 and 4800 bps Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 1200 2400 bps Trellis Multipoint 19200 14400 9600 7200 4800 and 2400 bps V 22bis 2400 bps V 27bis 4800 and 2400 bps V 33 14400 and 12000 bps and V 29 9600 7200 and 4800 bps Dial line modulations V 32 terbo 19200 and 16800 bps V 32bis 14400 12000 9600 7200 and 4800 bps V 32 9600 and 4800 bps Paradyne Point to Point Diagnostic 1200 2400 bps V 22bis 2400 bps V 22 1200 bps V 23 1200 and 600 bps V 21 300 bps Bell 212A 1200 bps and Bell 103J 300 bps Channel adaptive Trellis Coded Modulation Paradyne s advanced Trellis Coded transparent forward error correction for Trellis multipoint and high speed point to point applications 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 1 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems e Mixed inbound rates for multipoint applications e Convenient migration to new or optional features through software downloading e Extended data circ
149. dcast appears Press F1 or F2 to transfer an exact copy of the tributary modem s firmware to the DC connected control modem s using the Active Poll list Proceed to the section titled Implementing a Clone Remote Operation which follows the descriptions of multipoint cloning operations 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 37 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Viewing DC Broadcast Clone Results Choose DLL Type A DC_CloneResults A n From the Choose DLL Type screen press the gt key until DC_CloneResults appears to view the results of the last DC_Broadcast clone operation If the message Trib List Empty appears this indicates that a multiple download was never initiated DC Clone Results A INC XXX A L8 L8 The address field xxx displays the network management address of of remote modems Pressing the F1 key allows you to select various remote modems to determine the download result for those modems Pass or Fail Clone Remote in Multipoint Configurations A Trellis Multipoint TMp control modem can be used to download firmware to just one tributary modem Single or to all of its tributary modems Multiple NOTE A Trellis Multipoint TMp tributary modem cannot download firmware to its control modem To download firmware to a TMp control modem use a point to point dial connection an NMS or a PC controller B
150. drive one RS 232 load 11 Unassigned 12 CT112 CI 112 DCE Data Signal Rate Select 13 Reserved for future function 14 Reserved for future function 15 TXC DB 114 DCE Transmit Clock 16 Reserved for future function 17 RXC DD 115 DCE Receive Clock 18 CT141 LL 141 DTE Local Loopback 20 DTR CD 108 DTE Data Terminal Ready 21 CT140 RL 140 DTE Remote Loopback 22 RI CE 125 DCE Ring Indicator 23 CT111 CH 111 DTE Data Rate Selector 24 XTXC DA 113 DTE External Clock 25 TEST TM 142 DCE Test Mode 2 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Pin Assignments VF Connector Pin Assignments Table C 2 lists the connector pin assignments for Model 3910 modular jacks as well as the pin assignments for the TELCO jacks See Figure C 1 Table C 2 VF Connector Pin Assignments Type of Telco Jack Pin Leased Dial 6 Pin RJ11 JM8 Leased 1 4 Wire TX Ring 1 2 Wire TX RX 2 4 Wire TX Tip 1 2 Wire TX RX 3 4 Ring Ring Ring 5 Tip Tip Tip 6 7 4 Wire RX Tip 8 4 Wire RX Ring PIN 2 490 8769 PIN 8 Figure C 1 VF Pin Orientation 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 C 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Auxiliary Cables Not Supplied To add an external telephone to your modem use an external Y cable to connect the phone line to both the modem and the telephone Figure C 2 laa ate Rate Raia Rate Bata 6 POSITION PLUG PI
151. ds INV is returned Program Normal PRN The Program Normal PRN command allows the DTE to enter and store a telephone number to a specific directory location PRN is similar to the AT amp Z command The PRN command format is PRNx n Where x is the directory location 1 24 n is the telephone number Request List of Delayed Numbers RLD The Request List of Delayed Numbers RLD command displays telephone numbers that are currently delayed as a result of failed call attempts the numbers currently delayed are displayed irrespective of whether they belong to a directory location The RLD command format is RLD Request List of Forbidden Numbers RLF The Request List of Forbidden Numbers RLF command displays telephone numbers that are forbidden as a result of failed call attempts All the numbers forbidden are displayed irrespective of whether they belong to a directory location The RLF command format is RLF D 4 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 CCITT V 25bis Dialing Commands and Responses Request List of Stored Numbers RLN The Request List of Stored Numbers RLN command displays telephone numbers stored in the modem s directory location If the RLN command is entered without specifying a directory location then all directory locations and telephone numbers appear If a directory location is entered then only that telephone number appears The RLN command format is RLN which displays all direct
152. e Leased Line M Async Sync Mode DTE Dialer Type AutoAnswerRing Dial Line Rate Leased Mode Async DTE Rate AT Escape Char Dialer Type V32bis Automode LeasedLine Rate Asyn Data Bits Escape GuardTim DialTone Detect V32bis Autorate V32bis Autorate Asyn Parity Bit BreakForceEscap Blind Dial Paus V32bis_Override V32bis Override Asyn Stop Bits CommandCharEcho BusyTone Detect Dial TX Level Leased TX Level DTR Action CarriageRtn Char Pause Time V22b Guard Tone Auto Dial Back DSR Control Backspace Char NoAnswer Timout V32bis Train AutoDialStandby RTS Action Linefeed Char Fast Disconnect SpecialStandby RTS Antistream Result Codes Line Crnt Disc DialStandby Time CTS Control ExtendResltCode Long Space Disc CarrierOn Level RTS CTS Delay ResultCode Form No Carrier Disc V27bis Train LSD Control AT Cmnd Mode No Data Disc V29 TrainOnData TX Clock Source V25bis Coding Auto Make Busy V29 Retrain Bakup TXCIk Src V25bis IdleFill MakeBusyVia DTR V29 Link Config XTXC Clamps TXC CT111 Rate DTE Rate VF Extend Main Ch Upstream Port V25b NewLineChr TMp Train Time TMp TxPreemphasis Lease Lookback Dual Leased Ln BackupLineCheck A 2 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Menu Tree from previous page Security Remote Choose Address TMP Control only Choose Password TMP only Not in TMp Trib Secondary data blckd ExitRem appears instead of Remote when using
153. e faults have occurred To remove sequence fault records from both the LCD and nonvolatile memory select Clear The message Modem O K appears To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the Zx key Configure Branch The Configure branch of the LCD allows you to change and save the modem s configuration options For configuration options and DCP configuration procedures refer to Chapter 4 DCP Configuration Poll List Branch The Poll List function is not available on Point to Point control modems or Multipoint Tributary modems The Poll List Plist branch of the Top Level menu allows you to identify downstream modems in order to support health and status polling and download broadcasting The maximum number of devices is 32 on the secondary channel and 64 on the diagnostic channel Tributary only Display Clear Change Add Acquire Active Delete Skip 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 25 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To access PList from the Top Level menu make the following selections Leased 19 2 A PList Control lt Em e 8 Press the key until PList appears Select PList Within a network link a control modem can communicate with a tributary modem by using the tributary modem s network management address for polling functions Each tributary modem must have a differ
154. e line dial permissive applications RJ21X for multiple line dial permissive applications 66 punchdown block e One Network Interface Module NIM for modems installed in Slots 1 8 and one NIM for modems installed in Slots 9 16 required for dial line applications For installation of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier into a cabinet refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual Model 3910 Modem Installation Before installing your standalone modem make sure your installation site is clean and well ventilated Allow space around the modem for installing cables and telephone cords and make sure the modem is located within reach of the ac power outlet The distance between your modem and DTE should be minimized if DTE data rates exceed 19 200 bps Also low capacitance cables may be necessary for speeds greater than 19 200 bps or distances greater than 50 feet 2 2 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Modem Installation The rear panel of the Model 3910 modem Figure 2 1 has the following switches and connectors An ON OFF power switch e An 8 DIN type power receptacle PWR for the dc power supply e An 8 pin modular keyed jack LEASED for 4 wire 2 wire leased lines e An 8 pin modular keyed jack DIAL for backup lines 2 wire dial or 2 wire leased e 4 pin modular jack for the NMS network management system connection e A 25 pin DB 25 S receptacle for the DTE interface Connecting Cables
155. e the allowed time limit was exceeded before the modem received a DTE password from the remote DTE Inval Orig PsWd The modem did not attempt to establish the call as requested because the originate password in the AT dial command was not valid DTR Dial Blockd DTR dialing is not permitted when security is enabled This message appears if DTR dialing is used and Answer Access or Originate Access security is enabled SecurityBlocked The access verification capabilities are not available and the modem does not pass data to the DTE under any circumstances This message appears only when the modem is in base mode a mode that occurs during a firmware download and Answer Access Security is enabled The Top Level menu s main branches appear on the LCD in the order of Status Configure Control Test Call Setup Talk Data Security and Remote These branches are discussed in this chapter except for the Configure branch which is reserved for Chapter 4 DCP Configuration and the Security branch which is reserved for Chapter 6 Dial Access Security 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 13 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Quick Configuration Display The Quick Configuration display indicates the basic operational characteristics of the modem Leased 19 2 xt A Status A ED a re 8 To access the Quick Configuration display from the Top Level display press the lt key Leas
156. ears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 4 5 1 of 6 Leased Line Configuration Options Leased Mode 4WLL Ans Nxt 4WLL Ans 4WLL Orig 2WLL Orig 2WLL Ans Leased Mode Sets the modem for either 2 wire or 4 wire operation in Answer mode receiving a call or 2 wire or 4 wire operation in Originate initiating a call mode NOTE For proper operation of V 32 modulations over leased lines one modem must be set to Originate mode and the other set to Answer mode For Sync Leased Answer Mode Async Leased Answer Mode and Trellis Multipoint Tributary Mode 4 wire Answer is the factory default For Sync Leased Originate Mode Async Leased Originate Mode and Trellis Multipoint Control Mode 4 wire Originate is the factory default The AT command for Disable is amp LO The AT command for 2 wire Originate is amp L1 The AT command for 4 wire Originate is amp L2 The AT command for 2 wire Answer is amp L3 The AT command for 4 wire Answer is amp L4 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 33 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 5 2 of 6 Leased Line Configuration Options LeasedLine Rate 19200 V32t Nxt 19200 V32t 16
157. eased Backup Connection For the Model 3910 use the following procedures to connect the modem to the 2 wire leased backup network interface 1 Insert the 8 position 8 conductor modular plug into the jack labeled DIAL Figure 2 1 2 Insert the other end of the modular cord into the leased line network interface 2 4 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Modem Installation Network Management System Connection For the Model 3910 use the following procedures to connect the modem to the network management system interface 1 Insert the sub miniature 4 conductor modular plug of the 3600 Hubbing Device into the jack labeled NMS Figure 2 1 Refer to Document Number 3610 A2 GZ45 3600 Hubbing Device Feature Number 3600 F3 300 Installation Instructions for a description of the 3600 Hubbing Device Installation for the 3910 is the same as for the 3610 DSU 2 Connect the 3600 Hubbing Device to the network management channel Figure G 4 in Appendix G Power Supply Connection Use the following procedures to connect the modem to an ac power outlet 1 Make sure the modem s power switch is in the OFF position 2 Insert the power supply s 8 pin DIN connector into the modem s rear panel dc power receptacle Figure 2 1 3 Connect the power supply to a grounded ac power outlet Modem Power Up Once your modem is properly connected to the power supply leased and or dial lines and the DTE press the modem s rear panel power swi
158. ecific value for that command PRESS Enter In Table 5 2 the value for X is listed in the AT Command column and the value for is listed in the Description column 5 4 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 2 1 of 3 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence A Repeat Last Command Reexecutes last command string Not to be Call Setup preceded with AT or followed by pressing the Return key Answer A Answer Mode Goes off hook and attempts to establish a connection None without waiting for a ring Dn Dial Begins the dialing sequence The dial string n modifiers and None telephone number is entered after the D command Any digit 0 9 or may be dialed as a DTMF tone Only the digits 0 9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode The following example shows how to dial through a PBX The dial string consists of the command string and the telephone number ATD9W5551234 Modifiers include the following parameters T Tone DTMF dial Any digit 0 9 or can be dialed as tone P Pulse dial Only digits 0 9 can be dialed in Pulse Dial mode NOTE Once a dialing method tone or pulse has been specified it will only remain active until the end of that dial string The modem defaults to the value set by the Dialer Type configuration option Pause Causes the modem to pause before processing the next character in the d
159. ector on the cable to the DB 25 S socket connector labeled DTE Figure 2 1 on the modem s rear panel Use a small screwdriver to secure the cable to the modem 3 Connect the DB 25 P connector on the cable to the DB 25 S connector on the DTE Use a small screwdriver to secure the cable to the DTE Model 3910 4 Wire 2 Wire Leased Line Connection Use the following procedures to connect a Model 3910 to the leased line network interface 1 Insert the 8 position 8 conductor modular plug into the jack labeled LEASED Figure 2 1 2 Insert the other end of the modular cord into the leased line network interface Dial Network Connection The telephone company provides the line termination jacks for the permissive service you request Advance coordination with the telephone company is suggested when connecting the modem to telephone dial lines PSTN In the Permissive mode the modem s transmit output level is fixed at 9 dBm The telephone company assumes that the line loss is 3 dB and no compensation is provided for additional losses A Permissive mode telephone line is usually terminated with a USOC RJ11C jack Model 3910 Dial Backup Connection For the Model 3910 use the following procedures to connect the modem to the dial backup network interface 1 Insert the 6 position 4 conductor modular plug into the jack labeled DIAL Figure 2 1 2 Insert the other end of the modular cord into the dial network interface Model 3910 L
160. ed 19 2 mh A cdd ee ffff SiJlelyy c The modem s Quick Configuration information appears on the LCD s bottom line a Displays the network position of the modem The letter C indicates this is a control modem and T indicates this is a tributary modem bbb Displays the network management address of the modem The valid address field range is from 001 to 256 c Displays the DTE mode The letter A indicates the modem is in Asynchronous mode and S indicates the modem is in Synchronous mode dd Displays the line mode The letters LA indicate Leased Answer mode LO indicate Leased Originate mode and D indicates Dial mode ee Displays the modem DTE port that is currently being displayed by the EIA status indicators on the DCP P1 indicates Port 1 CC indicates Control Channel DC indicates Diagnostic Channel ffff Displays the modem s modulation scheme as shown below V32t indicates V 32 terbo modulation V32b indicates V 32bis modulation V32 indicates V 32 modulation TMp indicates Trellis Multipoint modulation V22b indicates V 22bis modulation V27b indicates V 27bis modulation V33 indicates V 33 modulation V29 indicates V 29 modulation V22 indicates V 22 modulation V23 indicates V 23 modulation V21 indicates V 21 modulation 212A indicates Bell 212A modulation 103J indicates Bell 103J modulation To exit the Quick Configuration function and return to the Top Level menu press the
161. ed for TMp V 54 Device Type Identifies where the modem is physically located in the network m Peripheral The modem is located at the endpoint of the network and is not connected back to back with another modem m intermediate The modem is either of the two modems connected back to back The AT command for Peripheral is S Register 5420 The AT command for Intermediate is S Register S54 1 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 47 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Misc The Miscellaneous configuration options determine specifics for various functions including network management parameters and remote modem access Table 4 8 shows each Misc Miscellaneous configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 4 8 1 of 4 Miscellaneous Configuration Options StrapsWhenDisc No Change Nxt No Change Reload Straps When Disconnected Determines whether or not configuration options in the Active Saved configuration area are reloaded to Active Operating when a disconnect occurs This is useful in modem pooling applications m No Change Configuration options do not change if a disconnect occurs m R
162. ed to connect the SDCP to a specific slot in the carrier A Key The 2 key returns you to the Top Level menu display from anywhere in the menu tree Pressing Zx while changing configuration options displays the message Save Straps Yes No If No is selected changes made to configuration options are not saved and the Top Level menu appears If Yes is selected then changes are saved to either Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration areas Key The A key moves you up one level in the menu tree lt and Keys Use the 2 and gt keys to move the viewing window left or right and to scroll the remaining branches and selections into view A maximum of three selections can be displayed at one time 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems These keys also allow you to move the cursor one character to the left or right on data entry displays for example to allow entry of one digit at a time Fi F2 F3 Keys Function keys select the LCD choice that appears above the function key they are labeled F1 F2 and F3 If a selection spans more than one function key then any of those keys choose that selection Select The Select Key Model 3911 only key appears on the optional SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier It is used to connect the SDCP to a modem in a specific slot in the carrier Menu Structu
163. efault setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F Table 4 3 1 of 5 Line Dialer Configuration Options AutoAnswerRing 1 Nxt 1 Disable 2 4 6 8 10 Auto Answer Ring Count Determines the number of rings necessary before the answering modem answers an incoming call For example if this option is set to 2 then the answering modem answers after the second ring m Disable If selected the modem must be answered using either the DCP s Answer command or Tlk Data function or via AT commands Refer to Talk Data in Chapter 3 DCP Operation for more on Manual Answer NOTE Although DCP selections are limited 1 2 4 6 8 or 10 values set by AT commands can display from 1 to 255 rings NOTE The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries The AT command for Disable is S020 The AT command is S Register SO n where n is ring count from 1 to 255 Dialer Type Tone Nxt Tone Pulse Dialer Type Selects either tone DTMF dialing or pulse rotary dialing mode NOTE Pulse Mode is disabled in Denmark and in Sweden The AT command for Tone is T The AT command for Pulse is P DialTone Detect Enable Nxt Enable Disable Dial Tone Detect Sets the modem for dial tone
164. efore using Clone Remote in multipoint configurations Single or Multiple perform the following e Make sure the 391x Series modems have an established leased line connection using the Trellis Multipoint TMp modulation refer to the Leased Line section in Chapter 4 e Make sure the remote modem s Access From Remote configuration option is enabled refer to the Misc section in Chapter 4 For Single download configurations know the remote access password and the network management address of the remote tributary modem that will receive the download Refer to the Misc section in Chapter 4 for a description of the remote access password RemAccssPasswrd configuration option and the network management address NetMngmtAddress configuration option 3 38 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation e For Multiple download configurations ensure that the control modem s active poll list contains all the network management addresses for the remote tributary modems that will receive the download refer to the Poll List section in this chapter and ensure that the tributaries are responding properly to polls refer to the Sub Network Health and Status Branch section in this chapter Cloning a Single TMp Remote Choose DLL Type A Multiple Zx Gc 8 amp Press the F1 key to select Single Clone Remote Choose Address SB E TXXX CAS 88 The address fie
165. eive Signal Level High 0 dBm to 15 dBm Above 9 dBm Receive Signal Level Low 16 dBm to 50 dBm Below 23 dBm Signal to Noise Ratio 5 dB to 40 dB Below 23 dB Non Linear Distortion 15 dB to 50 dB Below 30 dB Retrains 1 to 256 trains 15 trains per 15 minutes Signal Quality Excellent lowest Good Good Fair Poor No Signal highest Near Echo 0 38 dBm Above 20 dBm Far Echo 0 38 dBm Above 20 dBm 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 45 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Test Branch The Test branch of the Top Level menu allows you to initiate various modem tests Use these tests if you are having data communication problems such as periodic character loss random errors or constant format errors By the process of elimination you can usually isolate the fault in your system There are six selections under Test Abort Self Self Test Loc Analog Loop Local Analog Loopback Rem Digital Loop Remote Digital Loopback Loc Digital Loop Local Digital Loopback and Pattern The only tests that can operate concurrently on a single modem are Pattern with a Local Analog Loopback and Pattern with a Remote Digital Loopback If any test is operating besides the two combinations just mentioned it must be canceled before starting another test The Test branch only initiates and cancels tests If any parameters need to be set refer to the Test section discussed in Chapter 4 DCP Configuration Css
166. elephone company will provide advance notice in order for you to make the necessary modifications in order to maintain uninterrupted service 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 1 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems 7 If you experience trouble with this equipment please contact your sales or service representative as appropriate for repair or warranty information If the product needs to be returned to the company service center for repair contact them directly for return instructions using one of the following methods Via the Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http www paradyne com Via Telephone Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 International call 813 530 2340 If the trouble is causing harm to the telephone network the telephone company may request that you remove the equipment from the network until the problem is resolved The user is not authorized to repair or modify the equipment This equipment cannot be used on public coin service provided by the telephone company Connection to Party Line Service is subject to state tariffs Contact the state public utility commission public service commission or corporation commission for information 1 6 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Introduction Canada NOTICE TO THE USERS OF THE CANADIAN PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE
167. elephone numbers The modem has nonvolatile memory locations that allow you to store up to 24 telephone numbers Each directory location can accept up to 40 characters this includes the telephone number and dial command modifiers Any telephone number dialed using the DCP Dial command must appear in a directory location NOTE If the modem is operating on leased lines and has a dial line attached for dial backup purposes it is required that directory location 1 contain the telephone number used for dial backup To access Change Directory from the Call Setup branch make the following selections Call Setup A Change Directory A 88 Press the key until Change Directory appears Press any function key to select Change Directory 01 551234 e 1 Hi 88 ejl The phone number listed in directory location 1 appears Select Nxt to display other directory locations 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 59 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Entering Telephone Numbers and Dial Command Modifiers into Directory Locations The following example uses an empty directory location for describing how to enter a telephone number If you want to change an existing telephone number in any of the 24 directory locations follow the same procedures To add a telephone number to a directory location make the following selections Select Nxt until a
168. eload The Active Operating configuration area which controls modem operation is reloaded from the Active Saved configuration area when a disconnect occurs This is useful in modem pooling applications where it is desirable to start the modem from a known condition after every call This allows multiple users to issue AT commands to change the modem s operation for their particular call NOTE If Reload is selected the following AT commands are disabled although the OK result code appears when the following commands are issued AT amp FO AT amp F1 AT amp F2 AT amp F3 AT amp F4 AT amp F5 AT amp F6 AT amp F7 AT amp F8 AT amp WO AT amp W1 AT amp W2 and AT amp Zn x The AT command for the Straps When Disconnected configuration option is S Register S88 n where n is 0 or 231 for No Change and 1 or 232 for Reload Speaker Control OnUntilCarr Nxt OnUntilCarr Off On Speaker Control Determines if the speaker is OFF ON until carrier signal is received by the modem or ON all the time NOTE Speaker Control can also be temporarily set using the Control branch however a reset or power cycle will restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings The AT command for Off is MO The AT command for On Until CD is M1 The AT command for On is M2 4 48 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 8 2 of 4 Miscellaneous Configuration Options Speaker Vol
169. em s Device Health and Status DeviceHS branch is accessed To access Self from the Test branch make the following selection Test A Kee Self j A eJ L8 gt Select Self LCD cells and DCP status indicators light 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 47 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems NOTE For tributary modems only the test is delayed 30 seconds to allow any outstanding network management messages to propagate upstream before the VF channel is interrupted by the test If the modem passes the self test Pass appears on the LCD If it fails Failed appears If the modem fails contact your service representative If Invalid Command appears on the LCD the modem is operating on dial lines or another test is in progress If another test is in progress select Abort to clear the current test and try again If the modem is operating on dial lines disconnect to clear the dial lines and then choose Self If the modem receives a ring signal during this test the test is canceled and the RI Abort message appears To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the Zx key Loc Analog Loop Loc Analog Loop performs a local analog loopback CCITT V 54 Loop 3 Figure 3 4 that verifies modem operation as well as the connection between the DTE and modem The modem must be offline and in Synchronous or Asynchronous D
170. ent network management address Refer to the Misc section in Chapter 4 for a description of the network management address NetMngmtAddress configuration option Over a diagnostic channel a tributary modem can communicate with control modems by using the control modem s network management address for polling functions In the poll list modems may be listed as either Active or Skip Modems in the Active poll list are polled by the upstream modem Modems in the Skip poll list are passed over during the polling process but they are not deleted from the poll list Display Display allows you to view the modem s poll list To access Display from the PList branch make the following selection Poll List Fs Ee Cigar A M Select Display NOTE If there are no modems in the poll list when you select Display the message Poll List Empty appears on the second line of the LCD I List Disp A Nxt XXX yyyyyy A lt gt 3 26 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Clear Change If there are modems in the poll list when you select Display XXX Displays the network management address of the modem in the poll list yyyyyy Displays either Active or Skip to indicate the poll list in which the network management address is included Select Nxt to scroll through the entries in the Active or Skip poll lists To exit this function and remain
171. ents for using these modems Chapter 2 provides instructions for installing the 391x Series modems Chapter 3 provides the information required to operate the Model 3910 using the diagnostic control panel and the Model 3911 using the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier s shared diagnostic control panel SDCP Chapter 4 provides the information required to set configuration options in the 391x Series modems using the modem s diagnostic control panel Chapter 5 provides instructions for displaying and changing AT commands and S Registers Chapter 6 provides instructions for using the Dial Access Security feature Appendix provides a menu tree for the 391x Series modems Appendix B provides instructions for performing diagnostic tests when data communication problems occur Appendix C provides EIA 232 D and VF TELCO pin assignments Appendix D provides V 25bis dialing information Appendix E provides an ASCII translation chart Appendix F provides a list of all default configuration options available for the factory preset configurations Appendix G provides diagrams of sample configurations for the 391x Series modems Appendix H provides an equipment list for the 391x Series modems The Glossary provides a description of terms used throughout this manual 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 vii COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Related Documents 3000 A2 GA31 3610 A2 GZ45 3910 A2 GK41 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation
172. er The user interface to any Model 3911 is through the shared diagnostic control panel SDCP an optional feature which operates in a 1 4 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Introduction manner similar to the DCP on the Model 3910 For a better understanding of DCP operation refer to Chapter 3 DCP Operation The COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has a total of 17 slots The first slot Slot 0 is reserved for the shared diagnostic unit SDU while the remaining 16 slots can house up to 16 Model 3911 modems or a combination of Model 3911 modems and other units For more details on the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual Government Requirements and Equipment Return Certain governments require that instructions pertaining to modem connection to the public switched telephone network be included in the installation and operation manual Specific instructions are listed in the following sections United States NOTICE TO USERS OF THE PUBLIC SWITCHED TELEPHONE NETWORK 1 This equipment complies with Part 68 of the rules On the equipment is a label that contains among other information the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence number REN for this equipment The label is located on the bottom of the Model 3910 modem This label is located on the Model 3911 s circuit card assembly If requested this information must be provided to the telephone company Page
173. er S93 n where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable V29 Link Config PointToPoint Nxt PointToPoint Multipoint This configuration option is only available if Leased Line Rate is configured for V29 V 29 Link Configuration Selects point to point or multipoint operation NOTE Remote mode and the Cloning function are not available when configured for V 29 Multipoint The AT command is S Register S94 n where n is 0 for PointToPoint and 1 for Multipoint TMp Train Time 50 Nxt 50 10 20 100 200 300 This configuration option is only available if Leased Line Rate is configured for TMp Trellis Multipoint TMp Train Time Defines the length of time energy is sent from the tributary modem to the control modem More severe line conditions require longer time selections The AT command is S Register S95 n where n is 0 for 10 milliseconds 1 for 20 milliseconds 2 for 50 milliseconds 3 for 100 milliseconds 4 for 200 milliseconds and 5 for 300 milliseconds TMp TxPreemphasis Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option is only available if Leased Line Rate is configured for TMp Trellis Multipoint TMp Transmit Preemphasis Provides amplification for frequencies above the carrier frequency to compensate for high frequency line attenuation The AT command is S Register S96 n where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable Lease Lookback Disable Nxt Disable Enable Lease Lookback While operating on backup lines this c
174. eral Communications Commission Board of Commissioners that regulates all interstate and foreign electrical communication systems that originate from the United States A method of error control for data transmission where the receiving device can detect and correct a character or block of code containing a predetermined number of erroneous bits A communications computer associated with a host computer that manages the routing of data through the network Simultaneous two way communications Any one of three keys on the DCP that allows you to select or increment an LCD entry Function keys are labeled F1 F2 and F3 Two way data communications allowed in only one direction at a time The exchange of predetermined codes and signals tones to establish a connection between two modems High Level Data Link Control A communications protocol defined by the International Standards Organization ISO A computer attached to a network that shares its information and devices with the rest of the network A unit of frequency Hertz that equals one cycle per second A state in which the modem s operating parameters can be modified or commands can be issued to the modem using either AT commands or the DCP A jack used for leased line networks Pins 1 and 2 are the transmit pair and Pins 7 and 8 are the receive pair A set of seven keys surrounding the DCP s LCD These keys are used to select configuration options and to maneuver thr
175. erface section of Chapter 4 If using a PC verify that the modem is attached to the correct communications port 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 B 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table B 5 1 of 2 Modem VF Connection Symptom Action The modem does not receive a dial tone Attach a telephone directly to the telephone line to verify that a dial tone exists Make sure the VF line is connected to the modem s rear jack labeled DIAL The modem does not go off hook and answer an incoming call Verify that the Auto Answer Ring Count configuration option is set to a value other than 0 disable Refer to Line Dialer in Chapter 4 Verify that the DTE is providing DTR to the modem If the DTE does not provide DTR to the modem verify that the modem s DTR Action configuration option is set for Ignore Refer to DTE Interface in Chapter 4 Verify that all cables are attached to the correct connectors on the rear of the modem The modem goes off hook answers but does not connect Perform a Local Analog Loopback test and verify that data entered at the DTE is echoed back to the DTE Verify that the originating modem is compatible with your receiving modem Verify that the originating modem recognizes your modem s answer tone Verify that the originating modem supports your modem s modulation schemes The 391x Series modem recognizes CCITT V 32bis V 32 V 22bis V 22 V 21 Bell 212A an
176. eries modems and the response to those commands Tables D 1 and D 2 list the V 25bis commands and response messages NOTE The 391x Series modem must be configured for V 25bis dialing Refer to DTE Dialer Type configuration option in Chapter 4 DCP Configuration 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 D 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Call Request Commands Call Request commands are issued from the DTE to the modem and are responsible for initiating dial calls Call Request commands include Call Request with Number Provided CRN and Call Request with Stored Memory Address Provided CRS Call Request with Number Provided CRN The CRN command dials the telephone number entered from the DTE CRN is similar to the ATD command The CRN command format is CRNn Where n is the telephone number to be dialed Call Request with Stored Memory Address Provided CRS The CRS command dials the telephone number stored in the request directory location CRS is similar to the ATDS command The CRS command format is CRSx Where x is directory location 1 24 The modem responds to the command with either a VAL valid or INV invalid response followed by a call progress report such as connect CNX or failure CFI Call Response A Call Response indicates if the command was accepted by the modem Call Response includes Call Failure Indication CFI and Call Connecting CNX Call Failure Indication CFI The CFI resp
177. evel either 26 dBm or 43 dBm LSD turns OFF When the carrier signal is greater than this level LSD turns ON For TMp Control 26dbm is the factory default The AT command is S Register S48 n where n is 0 for 43 dBm and 1 for 26 dBm V27bis Train Short Nxt Short Long This configuration option is only available if Leased Line Rate is configured for V27bis 4 36 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 5 5 of 6 Leased Line Configuration Options V 27bis Train Controls the train time for V 27bis operation The AT command is S Register S70 n where n is 0 for Short and 1 for Long V29 TrainOnData Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Leased Line Rate is configured for V29 V 29 Train On Data When enabled the modem receiver can train based upon the incoming data or a training sequence from the distant modem This function is necessary for a remote tributary modem in a V 29 multipoint network and is recommended for a control modem as well The AT command is S Register S92 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable V29 Retrain Enable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Leased Line Rate is configured for V29 V 29 Retrain When enabled the modem transmits a training sequence whenever it receives one This configuration option should normally be disabled for control modems The AT command is S Regist
178. f digits and z is the rightmost pair or fourth pair of digits For example if the remote access password is 12345678 then the value for S56 is 1 and 2 and the value for S59 is 7 and 8 Dir 1 Callback Disable Nxt Disable Enable Directory Location 1 Callback This configuration option controls whether or not the modem s single number callback function is used m Disable Modem does not use the single number callback function m Enable Modem answers a call disconnects and dials the number stored in directory location 1 NOTE This function is disabled if dial access security is enabled The AT Command to Disable is S Register 867 0 The AT Command to Enable is S Register S67 1 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 49 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 8 3 of 4 Miscellaneous Configuration Options NMS Call Msgs CallCnct amp Prg Nxt CallCnct amp Prg Disable CallCnctOnly CallProgOnly NMS Call Messages Determines if the modem status and or call summary information is sent to the NMS The modem can itemize status such as CallProgress messages or it can report a summary of activity such as Call Connect messages to the NMS m Call Connect amp Progress Enables both Call Connect and Call Progress information to be transmitted to the NMS m Disable Modem status and call summary information is not sent to the NMS Call Connect Only The modem accumulates call statistics over a period of time and then
179. factory setting is ASCII Configure Edit DTE Dialer S63 V 25bis Idle Character Register identifies to the modem the type of idle fill used by the DTE while in V 25bis mode Register has the following values 0 Mark 1 Flag The factory setting is Mark Configure Edit DTE Dialer S64 V 25bis New Line Character Register identifies to the modem the type of line terminator used by the DTE while in V 25bis mode Register has the following values 0 Carriage Return and Line Feed 1 Carriage Return 2 Line Feed The factory setting is carriage return and line feed CR LF Configure Edit DTE Dialer S65 Line Current Disconnect Register determines if the modem disconnects if an 8 millisecond or 90 millisecond interruption in loop current occurs Register has the following values 0 Enable 8msec 1 Enable 90msec 2 Disable The factory setting is Enable 8msec Configure Edit Line Dialer 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 5 21 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 4 8 of 13 391x Series S Registers S Register Description DCP LCD Command Sequence 566 NMS Call Messages Register determines if the modem sends information regarding status Call Progress and or sends summarized call statistics Call Connect to the 6700 Series Network Management System NMS Register has the following values 0 Call Connect amp Progress 1 Disable
180. fer to Table 5 1 for a listing of result codes Once the modems are online either by answering or originating a call they automatically switch to Data mode Data mode is a state where any entries made from the DTE are considered data and are transmitted and received between modems The modems remain in Data mode until the connection is broken or until they are forced into online Command mode using the escape sequence Switching Between Data Mode and Online Command Mode Sometimes it is necessary to change operating parameters while the modems are online The Escape Sequence allows you to toggle the modem between Data mode and online Command mode while maintaining a connection with the remote modem This is accomplished using the escape sequence to exit Data mode and the O command to return to Data mode 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 5 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Escape Sequence and Escape Guard Time The escape sequence is only issued when the modem is online and in Data mode The 391x Series modem uses three consecutive plus characters as the escape sequence To change this value refer to S Register S2 discussed later in Table 5 3 in the S Register Format section To prevent the modem from interpreting an embedded in data as an escape sequence the Escape Guard Time value determines the length of the pause before and after the escape sequence is issued The 391x Series modem uses a one second pause as the E
181. figure Edit Leased S96 Trellis Multipoint TMp Tx Preemphasis Provides amplification for frequencies above the carrier frequency to compensate for high frequency line attenuation Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable Configure Edit Leased 5 26 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 4 13 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S97 Reduced Asynchronous Buffer Size Register limits the modem s Configure Edit buffer size to a maximum of 20 characters V42 MNP Buffer Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 98 Special Standby Supports automatic dial standby when a third modem Configure Edit is used for dial backup Leased Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 Enable The factory setting is Disable 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 5 27 Dial Access Security Chapter 6 Dial Access Security is not available for viewing online because it contains security sensitive information Dial Access Security information is available in the COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Models 3910 and 3911 Point To Point Multipoint Installation and Operation Manual Document No 3910 A2 GN32 30 To order product documentation contact your sales representative 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 199
182. ge return character Enter key e Commands with the suffix n have several options associated with them For example in the Ln command L1 sets the speaker volume to Low and L3 sets the speaker volume to High If no value is entered for the suffix the modem assumes a zero 0 value e The A command without pressing the Enter key causes the modem to repeat the last command entered e Valid commands are acknowledged with numeric or word result codes unless the result codes have been disabled using the Q1 command Table 5 1 lists all available result codes with numeric and word equivalents 5 2 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Result Codes Table 5 1 lists all valid result codes for the 391x Series modem Table 5 1 1 of 2 Result Codes ac Word Description 0 0 OK Command executed 1 1 CONNECT Modem connected to line 2 2 RING Modem receiving a ring voltage from the VF line 3 3 NO CARRIER Modem lost carrier signal does not detect carrier signal or does not detect answer tone 4 4 ERROR Invalid command 5 5 CONNECT 1200 Connection at 1200 bps 6 6 NO DIALTONE No dial tone detected 7 7 BUSY Busy or trunk busy signal detected 8 8 NO ANSWER No quiet answer 10 10 CONNECT 2400 Connection at 2400 bps 11 11 CONNECT 4800 Connection at 4800 bps 12 12 CONNECT 9600 Connection at 9600 bps 13 16 CONNECT
183. green A ringing signal is being received 3911 only Busy yellow The modem is placed in a forced busy condition and is off hook 3911 only Serv yellow The modem is connected to the carrier service line rather than the normally 3911 only assigned network SQ yellow The receive telephone line signal is degraded or the modem s data path has been blocked SQ flashes TXD 103 green The modem is receiving data from the DTE to transmit ON equals space RXD 104 green Data is being transferred to the DTE ON equals space RTS 105 green RTS signal is ON CTS 106 green CTS signal is ON DSR 107 green DSR signal is ON 3911 only DTR 108 green The DTE has turned ON DTR or the modem has forced DTR ON LSD 109 green The modem has detected a valid carrier signal and is capable of transferring data to the DTE Rate yellow ON The modem is connected at a data rate lower than the data rate it is 3910 only configured for OFF The modem is connected at its configured data rate Front Panel yellow The modem is connected to the carrier s SDCP 3911 only 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems The SDCP LEDs are listed and described in Table 3 2 Table 3 2 SDCP LEDs Label Color Indicates OK green Power is ON and the modem is capable of operating Alarm red The modem has detected a problem with its operation For example the modem failed a self test BckUp yellow T
184. group until the Async Sync Mode configuration option appears and set it to Sync b move up one level in the menu tree or move to the Top Level menu and follow the LCD messages to save the new modem settings m V 25bis HDLC Selects V 25bis HDLC as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem This is also known as bit oriented protocol This framing protocol uses flag address and control characters before the text block and a frame sequence check and flag after the text block m DTR Direct1 Allows the modem to automatically dial the number stored in directory location 1 whenever DTR turns ON DTR dialing cannot be used if dial access security is enabled m AT amp T Exclusive Enables a subset of the proprietary AT amp T command set which is required for some applications that use AT amp T equipment Currently the only application supported is AT amp T DATAKIT The AT commands for AT are amp MO amp M1 amp M3 or amp Q0 amp Q1 amp Q3 The AT commands for DTR Direct1 dialing are amp M2 or amp Q2 4 20 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 2 2 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options AT Escape Char 043 ASCI Nxt 043 ASCI This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT AT Escape Character The escape sequence allows you to move from Data mode to Command mode Use the AT Originate ATO command to return to Data mode The ASCII value of the e
185. he maximum data rate the modem uses is determined by the Dial Line Rate configuration option m System 85 Enables the full automode function with special provisions which are needed to work reliably in a System 85 or similar PBX modem pool NOTE When the V 32bis Automoding configuration option is enabled the V 21 protocol 0 300 bps is excluded from the Automoding sequence Instead the modem uses the Bell 103J protocol for 0 300 bps operation The AT command is S Register S78 n where n is 0 for Enable 1 for Disable and 2 for System 85 V32bis Autorate Enable Nxt Enable Disable StartAt48 StartAt96 This configuration option only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V 32 terbo V 32bis or V 32 data rate V 32bis Autorate Once connected the modem automatically lowers the line rate if line conditions become impaired When line conditions improve the modem automatically shifts up to the highest data rate the line can support This autorating only occurs between 19 200 bps and 4800 bps during V 32 V 32bis V 32 terbo connections m Start at 48 and Start at 96 Set the maximum connect rate for V 32 V 32bis V 32 terbo connections The AT command is S Register S76 n where nis 0 for Enable 1 for Disable 2 for Start at 48 and 3 for Start at 96 V32bis Override Disable Nxt Disable 2400 1200 This configuration option is ignored unless Dial Line Rate is 4800 V32b V 32bis Override Activates the Paradyne Point
186. he modem originally configured for leased line operation is now operating on dial networks in a Dial Backup mode Test yellow The modem is involved in a test Normal operation is not possible EC green The modem is in Error Control mode Diagnostic Control Panel Operation The 391x Series modem s diagnostic control panel DCP is the user interface to all functions used to configure and control the modem In addition to the status LEDs this interface includes the liquid crystal display LCD and keypad Figure 3 3 LCD Display LCD TOP LINE MOVES UP ONE HIDDEN CHOICE INDICATOR LEVEL FROM CURRENT DISPLAY Status Leased 19 2 Configure LEFT SCROLL KEY LCD BOTTOM LINE Figure 3 3 391x Series LCD and Keypad FUNCTION KEYS RETURNS DISPLAY TO TOP LEVEL MENU RIGHT SCROLL KEY The LCD consists of a top line and bottom line with each displaying a maximum of 16 characters at a time If more information is available on the LCD than what is currently displayed an indicator appears in the top right or bottom right hand corner of the LCD Use the lt 1 or key to scroll in the indicated direction to display more selections onto the LCD 3 6 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Hidden Choice Indicators Other Indicators Keypad The hidden choice indicators serve as an alert that other choices are available besides what is currently displaying on the LCD These indic
187. hen the modem is in Command mode To display the value of an S Register issue the following command TYPE ATSn Where n is the register number PRESS Enter To modify the value of an S Register issue the following command TYPE ATSn r Where n is the register number and r is the new value PRESS Enter In Table 5 4 the value for is listed in the S Register column and the value forr is listed in the Description column Table 5 4 1 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S0 Auto Answer Ring Number Register determines number of rings the Configure Edit modem will count before automatically answering a call Line Dialer Enter zero 0 if you do not want the modem to automatically answer any calls Otherwise enter a value from 1 255 for the number of rings to count before answering The factory setting is 1 S2 AT Escape Character Register determines ASCII value used for Configure Edit escape sequence to enter Command mode from Data mode DTE Dialer Enter a value from 0 to 127 for the escape character Any value greater than 127 causes the modem to disable the escape sequence When the escape sequence is disabled the modem cannot return to Command mode until the call is disconnected The factory setting is 43 key 53 Carriage Return Character Register determines ASCII value used as Configure Edit the carriage return Return key This charac
188. here n is the delay in minutes before the number can be called Call Answer Commands Call Answer commands disable or enable the modem s AutoAnswer function These commands are issued from the DTE Call Answer commands include Incoming Call INC Disregard Incoming Call DIC and Connect Incoming Call CIC Incoming Call INC The INC response informs the DTE that the modem has detected a ring tone At this point the DTE can issue the DIC command to disable the modem from answering the call INC is similar to the AT result code RING Disregard Incoming Call DIC The DIC command prevents the modem from answering an incoming call This command is only valid once the DTE receives an incoming call INC response from the modem A DIC must be issued within 5 seconds after receiving an INC The DIC command format is DIC If DIC is issued within 5 seconds the modem sends the VAL response to the DTE If DIC is issued after 5 seconds INV is returned 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 D 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Connect Incoming Call CIC The CIC command forces the modem to cancel any DIC commands and answer an incoming call This command is only valid when the DTE issues a DIC command CIC must be issued within 10 seconds after sending a DIC CIC is similar to the ATA command The CIC command format is CIC If CIC is issued within 10 seconds the modem sends the VAL response to the DTE If CIC is issued after 10 secon
189. hresholds select Nxt 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 43 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To save the edited threshold s RSL High dBm Em Z9 ea fre 8 Press the A key to scroll up to the Edit Save screen VF Thresholds A Edit Save Reset CA Select Save If the edited VF thresholds are valid the Save command stores them into nonvolatile memory When the Save completes the message Save Completed appears Save VF Thresh CA Es Out of Range A G L8 If the edited VF threshold is invalid out of range the error message Thd Out of Range appears This indicates the Save procedure was unsuccessful Return to the Edit screen and correct the invalid threshold range To correct the invalid VF threshold press A key to return to the VF Threshold Edit Save Reset screen VF Thresholds A ES Save NN A J e we Select Reset to restore the original default values into memory Repeat the Edit and Save procedure until the VF threshold s is valid and the Save completes successfully Save Completed To exit this function and remain in the Control branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key 3 44 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Table 3 8 Valid Ranges for VF Thresholds VF Thresholds Valid Ranges Default Values Rec
190. ial Async is the factory default The AT commands for Async Mode are amp MO or amp QO The AT commands for Sync Mode are amp M1 amp M2 amp M3 or amp Q1 amp Q2 amp Q3 Async DTE Rate 19200 Nxt 19200 57600 38400 14400 12000 9600 7200 4800 2400 1200 0 300 This configuration option only appears if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous DTE Data Rate Identifies the asynchronous DTE s operating rate to the modem Data rates from 57 600 bps to 300 bps are supported NOTE To prevent losing data in 57 600 bps applications a 16650 UART on the PC s serial port is required as well as a communications package which can take advantage of its 16 byte buffer In addition a 386 PC 25 MHz or faster is required and the RS232 cable length must be minimized to reduce capacitance NOTE To configure the Async DTE Rate different than the modem rate ensure that the Error Control Mode configuration option see the V 42 MNP Buffer section is set to BufferMode The AT prefix determines Async DTE Rate Asyn Data Bits 8 Nxt 8 7 9 DirectMde 6 DirectMde This configuration option only appears if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous Number of Data Bits Determines if the asynchronous data length is composed of 6 7 8 or 9 data bits This data length excludes start parity and stop bits 8 Sets data length to 8 data bits m 7 Sets data length to 7 data bits m 9 DirectMode Sets data length t
191. ial string The length of this pause is determined by the setting of the Pause Time configuration option refer to the Line Dialer configuration option group or by value held in S Register S8 Wait for dial tone The modem waits for a second dial tone before processing the dial string This can be the initial dial tone or can be used when dialing through a tandem PBX For example 9W 555 6789 R Reverse Dial mode Causes the originating modem to send out an answertone once it no longer detects ringback Ringback is the ring you hear at the originating site when making a call The R parameter must be the last character in the dial string For correct operation at least one ringback must be detected therefore the remote modem should be configured to answer on the second ring or subsequent rings 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 5 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 2 2 of 3 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Command Description Command Sequence Dn cont Quiet answer Wait for five seconds of silence after dialing the number If the silence is not detected the modem sends either a NO ANSWER result to the DTE Hook flash This causes the modem to go on hook for 0 5 seconds then return to off hook Return to Command mode Modem returns to Command mode after dialing a number without disconnecting the call Space Ignored by the di
192. ion option is not changed by loading factory default configuration options 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table F 1 7 of 7 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial id OTIO b Default Default Default Default Default Default Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Security Entry Wait Time 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec 20 sec VF Prompt Type 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone 2nd Dial Tone DTE Password 1 1 1 1 1 1 Tries DTE Password 013 ASCII 013 ASCII 013 ASCII 013 ASCII 013 ASCII 013 ASCII Termination Character DTE Password 008 ASCII 008 ASCII 008 ASCII 008 ASCII 008 ASCII 008 ASCII Backspace Character Get User ID Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable NMS 000 000 000 000 000 000 Reporting Answer Security No Answer No Answer No Answer No Answer No Answer No Answer Mode 4 Security Security Security Security Security Security Originate Security No Originate No Originate No Originate No Originate No Originate No Originate Mode 4 Security Security Security Security Security Security 2 This configuration option does not appear on Models 3910 A1 401 and 3911 B1 001 This configuration option is not changed by loading factory default configuration options F 8 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Sample Configur
193. irect mode to perform this test otherwise Invalid Command appears SENDS TEST MESSAGE TRANSMITTER gt DTE DTE INTERFACE NETWORK RECEIVER VERIFIES TEST MESSAGE LOCAL MODEM 491 13076 Figure 3 4 Local Analog Loopback To access Loc Analog Loop from the Test branch make the following selections Test A omm x lt mJ Press the gt key until Loc Analog Loop appears Press any function key to start this test 3 48 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Test Local Loop as A L5 NOTE For tributary modems only the test is delayed 30 seconds to allow any outstanding network management messages to propagate upstream before the VF channel is interrupted by the test The message Started appears on the LCD and the Test LED lights for the duration of the test If Invalid Command appears on the LCD another test is in progress Select Abort to clear the current test and try again If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled Test Timeout appears at the conclusion of the test If it is disabled the test operates until aborted For more information on the Test Timeout configuration option refer to the Test section in Chapter 4 A Ring Indicate during this test can cause errors To exit this function and remain in the Test branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu
194. is coded modulation tributary modem UL UNIX Dial USOC upstream modem V 32 terbo VF XOFF XON A device that enables the simultaneous transmission of multiple independent data streams into a single high speed data stream by simultaneously sampling the independent data streams and combining these samples to form the high speed stream Trellis Multipoint Paradyne s proprietary high speed fast poll multipoint modulation scheme The very top of the menu tree that displays modem status and all Top Level menu branches A process where two modems try to establish a connection over the VF line A modulation scheme developed by Paradyne which uses Forward Error Correction for multipoint and high speed point to point applications Tributary modems in network receive data from the control modem as well as from the network management system in the network Underwriter s Laboratories Inc A factory preset configuration area containing the configuration options most often used in a UNIX dial network Universal Service Ordering Codes A device connected closer to the host computer A modulation that adds the 19 200 bps and 16 800 bps data rates to the V 32bis data rates It is a Paradyne proprietary modulation not a CCITT standard Voice Frequency The part of the audio frequency range used to transmit voice sound usually 300 Hz to 3400 Hz This band is used by the modem for its modulated signal A characte
195. isconnect is N4 The AT command for V42 MNP or Buffer is N5 The AT command for LAPM or Disconnect is N6 The AT command for LAPM or Buffer is N7 V42bis Compress Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for V42 MNPorBfr or V42 MNPorDsc V 42bis Data Compression Enables or disables V 42bis data compression m Enable Data compression operates in both the transmit and receive directions This is the recommended setting for all applications m Disable V 42bis data compression is disabled This is rarely needed because V 42bis data compression does not cause data expansion for compressed data The AT command for Disable is HO The AT command for Enable is H1 H2 or H3 MNP5 Compress Enable Nxt Enable Disable This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for V42 MNPorBfr V42 MNPorDsc MNP or Buffr or MNP or Disc MNP5 Compression Determines if the modem uses MNP Class 5 data compression It can be set independently of V 42bis data compression Online changes do not take effect until a disconnect occurs The AT command for Disable is 96CO The AT command for Enable is C1 4 40 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 6 3 of 8 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options EC Negotiat Bfr Disa
196. jectives and Reader Assumptions vii Howto Use this Manual ek RR et memes vii Related Documents 2 9 eter eei eR RR te bee viii Ordering Infotma tion xe e eee et ede RO epe viii 1 Introduction cl Em 1 1 Mcr 1 1 ApplieaBOols ces eee bee eae A Eg 1 2 Leased Backup Applications sse core esrb 1 2 COMSPHERE 391x Series Models ect me ERR 1 2 Government Requirements and Equipment Return 1 5 Technical Specifications 2 05 eue eter a 1 8 2 Modem Installation VETVE W eicces oepa Eur Oe sek de betta eA 2 1 391x Senes Modem Package 2 sicco toe I Rp 2 1 Model 3910 Modem Installation 2 2 DTE Connection civ Shs he bs Sion Deere Ew ERE RUBER 2 4 Model 3910 4 Wire 2 Wire Leased Line Connection 2 4 Dial Network Connection idees pet p RR Re doe es 2 4 Model 3910 Dial Backup Connection 2o s 2 4 Model 3910 Leased Backup Connection 2 4 Network Management System Connection 2 5 Power Supply Connection esee De the eren 2 5 Modem Power Up dus cere aee e dad haa 2 5 Selecting Factory Configuration Options 2 6 Removing and Replacing Model 3910 Modems 2 9 Model 3911 Modem Installation 2 9 Removing and Replacing Model 3911 Modems 2 12 3910 A2 GN32 30 November
197. l string The length of this pause is determined by the setting of the Pause Time configuration option refer to the Line Dialer configuration option group or by the value held in S Register S8 W Wait for tone dial The modem waits for a second dial tone before processing the dial string This can be the initial dial tone or can be used when dialing through a tandem PBX R Reverse Dial mode Causes the originating modem to send out an answertone once it no longer detects ringback Ringback is the ring you hear at the originating site when making a call The R modifier must be the last character in the dial string Quiet answer Wait for five seconds of silence after dialing the number If the silence is not detected the modem sends the NO ANSWER result code to the DTE or displays the No Quiet Answer LCD status message Hook flash Causes the modem to go on hook for 0 5 seconds then return to off hook Return to Command mode Causes the modem to return to Command mode after dialing a number without disconnecting the call Space Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability Ignored by the dial string can be included to enhance readability lt of Number Hides all characters appearing on the LCD entered to the right of this indicator Directory Status Does Not Appear in North America
198. ld xxx displays the network management address of modem that will receive the download The valid address field range is from 001 to 256 To increment digits within the address field xxx use the lt i and gt keys to position the cursor _ under the digit that will be incremented Press the F2 1 key to increment the digit Press Enter Ent to select the modem that will receive the download Choose Password 25 tyyyyyyyy A The password field yyyyyyyy displays the remote access password for the modem that will receive the download To increment digits within the password field use the lt and gt keys to position the cursor under the digit that will be incremented Press the F2 f key to increment the digit Press Enter Ent to select the modem that will receive the download After completing these actions proceed to the section titled Implementing a Clone Remote Operation 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 39 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Cloning a Multiple TMp Remote Choose DLL Type 2 Single Multiple A En Press the F3 key to select Multiple Clone Remote After completing this action proceed to the next section Implementing a Clone Remote Operation Viewing Multiple TMp Clone Results Choose DLL Type gt A MPtCloneResults mj From the Choose DLL screen
199. le Configuration miesi seee veda s RR RR G 1 Equipment Last co eg neem RR E EE Rad H 1 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 iii COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems List of Figures Figure Page Tel Model IlO etenee ese Rer e te Rer rb be E A E RE DE 1 3 I UM T 1 4 2 1 Model 3910 Rear Panel and Power Supply 2 3 2 2 Installing a Model 3911 Modem ses eram t yr Rh 2 10 2 3 Circun Pack Lock a cache wed nb ended ee RR gh 2 11 3 1 Model S910 DCP oi os bos 3 3 3 2 Optional SDCP Model 3911 Faceplate and Optional SDU 3 4 3 3 391x Senes LCD and Keypad ceste ERR RERO Rete pU RS 3 6 3 4 Local Analog Loopback esse eese e hr hU eu ma RR 3 48 39 Remote Digital Loopback b RR seem a RE 3 49 3 6 Local Digital boopback e eacus m a Ree Reg 3 50 3 7 Pattern Test and Local Analog Loopback Test 3 51 3 8 Pattern Test and Digital Loopback Test eser oerte 3 52 3 0 End to End Pattern Test ose oe te th eo ae p s ene bw eiae 3 52 3 10 Dial Backup oo pb bets de OR od le ex und dece Beaker 3 58 4 DCP Configuration Process usse es teet Retos 4 2 4 2 AT Command Configuration Process ee e ee mee t Ree 4 3 Cl VEEm Orentatl noa cer x erret C 3 C 2 Wiring Diagram Y Cable for External Telephone
200. local 3900 Series modem and a remote 3900 Series modem the LCD displays Remote Mode Fail No Circuit Return to the Top Level menu For Trellis Multipoint TMp control modems you must specify the network management address of a tributary modem The following display does not appear in point to point or Trellis Multipoint tributary modems Choose Address a Er TXXX A L8 8 L8 m The address field xxx displays the network management address of the modem to be accessed by the Remote function The valid address field range is from 001 to 256 To increment digits within the address field xxx use the lt i and gt keys to position the cursor _ under the digit that will be incremented Press the F2 f key to increment the digit Press Enter Ent to select the modem that will be accessed by the Remote function 3 66 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation For Trellis Multipoint TMp modems control or tributary you must specify the remote access password of the modem that will be accessed by the Remote function The following display does not appear in point to point modems Choose Password AJ EE tyyyyyyyy A ES fe a The password field yyyyyyyy displays the remote access password of the modem to be accessed by the Remote function To increment digits within the password field use the lt 1 and gt keys to po
201. lock This prevents the modem from accidently being removed once it is installed in a carrier 7 Configure the modem as described in the Selecting Factory Configuration Options section earlier in this chapter SDU MODEL 3911 MODEM CIRCUIT CARD GUIDES 493 13095a LOCKED Figure 2 3 Circuit Pack Lock 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 2 11 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Removing and Replacing Model 3911 Modems CAUTION If the Model 3911 is removed from the carrier always use a ground strap when handling the modem Always store the Model 3911 in an antistatic bag when it is removed from the carrier It is not necessary to power down the carrier to remove and replace a Model 3911 modem Perform the following steps 1 Rotate the circuit pack lock until the release tab is exposed 2 Press down on the release tab and pull the modem away from the carrier s backplane 2 12 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation ul A P 3 2 Di enostic Control Panels de ee Re trs 3 2 Model 3910 Diagnostic Control Panel 3 3 Model 3911 Faceplate and Shared Diagnostic Control Panel SDCP 3 3 Status s c ooi ee eerte m bee tede bote Sc Cbr tpi eie aas 3 4 Diagnostic Control Panel Operation coco e eet ee RR ees 3 6 LCD Display iae dis obs GaSe eye bode nS EE REST 3 6 Hidden Choice Indicators
202. mary channel is extended Upstream Port Port End Porti Port2 Port3 Port4 Ports Porto Port7 Port8 This configuration option only appears on a control modem when the Extended Main Channel is enabled Upstream Port When an extended control modem s main primary channel is connected to a tributary modem that is one link above it in the diagnostic network this configuration option is set to the port number to which it is connected on the tributary modem DTE Dialer The DTE Dialer configuration options establish the DTE to modem protocol for call establishment and control Table 4 2 shows each DTE Dialer configuration option as it appears on the LCD with the Sync Leased factory default setting the default value if the modem is just being installed shown following the colon on the first line and with all available selections listed on the second line Following this is a description of the configuration option Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 19 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 2 1 of 5 DTE Dialer Configuration Options DTE Dialer Type Disable Nxt Disable AT V25bis Async V25bis Bsync V25bis HDLC DTR Direct1 AT amp T Exclusv Data Terminal Equipment Dialer Type Identifies to the modem the type of dialing method and protocol used by the DTE m Disable Disables any type of DTE dialing method Dialing can only be performed using the DCP s Dial co
203. milar to the Standard RS232 except that DSR does not turn ON until the modem enters Data mode Normally the modem raises DSR when it begins the handshaking process Use this setting when the DTE cannot operate with a long DSR to CTS delay common for V 32bis modulation or when dial access security is enabled and requires a DTE side password entry Often the DTE cannot accept the long delay between DSR and CTS turning ON due to the remote user entering the DTE side password The AT command for Forced On is amp SO The AT command for Standard RS232 is amp S1 The AT command for Wink When Disconnect is amp S2 The AT command for Follows DTR is amp S3 The AT command for On Early is amp S4 The AT command for Delay to Data is amp S5 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 13 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 1 5 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options RTS Action RS232 Nxt Stndrd RS232 Ignore Sim Cntl Car Car Request to Send Action RTS is a signal from the DTE indicating the DTE has data to send m Standard RS232 Allows the DTE to control RTS to the modem in normal EIA 232 D operation RTS must be ON for the DTE to transmit to the modem m Ignore Modem assumes RTS is always ON Use this selection when the DTE does not provide RTS to the modem m Simulated Control Carrier RTS input controls the remote modem s LSD signal This is used for DTEs that require Line Signal Detect LSD to t
204. mmand is S Register S46 n where n is 0 for Disable 1 for Enable and 2 for FastBackup 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 35 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 5 4 of 6 Leased Line Configuration Options AutoDialStandby Disable Nxt Disable 15min ihr 4hr Test 2min Adv 15min Adv 30min Adv 1 hr TestAdv2min This configuration option is not available if the LeaseLine Rate is configured for TMp and the NetworkPosition is configured for Control Automatic Dial Standby Permits a modem operating on dial lines regardless of the method of dialing origination to check the quality of the leased lines periodically and if they are good to disconnect from the dial lines and resume operations on the leased lines The time interval that the modem uses to check the quality of the leased lines is determined by the configuration option These intervals are 15 minutes 1 hour and 4 hours The Test 2min and TestAdv2min selections are for testing purposes only The Adv 15min Adv 30min and Adv 1 hr selections cause the modem to evaluate the leased lines continuously in a manner which is non disruptive to the dial line communication The AT command is S Register S47 n where n is 0 for Disable 1 for 15min 2 for 1hr for 4hrs 4 for Test 2min 5 for Adv 15min 6 for Adv 30min 7 for Adv 1 hr and 8 for TestAdv2min SpecialStandby Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Automatic Dial Standb
205. mmand or attached telephone m AT Allows AT command protocol to be used as a method for entering commands and dialing when used in an asynchronous application This is the only valid setting for leased line applications The modem will not respond to AT commands if DTE Dialer Type is not set to AT m V 25bis Async Selects V 25bis Async as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem The character length must be 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit m V 25bis Bsync Selects V 25bis Bsync as the dialing method and protocol used by the modem This is also known as character oriented protocol This framing protocol uses two synchronous control characters and a start of text control character before the text block and an end of text control character after the text block The correct character structure for V 25bis Bsync dialing is 7 data bits Odd parity and 1 stop bit If the modem is in Asynchronous mode enter the following command string to configure it for V 25bis Bsync dialing AT amp F amp D1 amp S1 amp M233 amp W If the modem is already configured for synchronous operation perform the following to set the character format 1 use the modem s front panel to access the Async Sync Mode configuration option and set it to Async 2 scroll down until the Asyn Bits configuration option appears and set it to 7 data bits 3 scroll down and set the Asyn Parity Bit configuration option to Odd 4 scroll through the DTE Interface
206. nd Data mode when manually dialing using either the DCP or an externally attached telephone To add an external telephone to your modem use an external Y cable to connect the phone line to both the modem and the telephone refer to Appendix C This cable is not supplied with your modem On initial power up the modem is in Talk mode When in Talk mode the modem is disconnected and you are free to use the telephone When in Data mode the modem is connected and data can be transmitted or received This function is not available for Model 3911 modems Tik Data 3 62 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation The following sections describe three uses of the Talk Data function Manual Dialing When the Remote Modem is Configured for Auto Answer NOTE On the remote modem the Line Current Disconnect configuration option refer to the Line Dialer section in Chapter 4 must be set to Disable This configuration option does not appear on Models 3910 A1 401 and 3911 B1 001 If you are originating a call using a telephone and the remote modem is configured for Auto Answer perform the following procedure Idle 19 2 A Tlk Data nj gt Press gt key until Tlk Data appears Lift the attached handset and dial the telephone number of the remote modem When the remote modem answers it transmits an answer tone Idle 19 2 A Tik Data A When you hear this to
207. ndby mode Leased Backup The modem is operating in Dial Backup mode at the displayed data rate and is configured for Direct mode Backup MHR The modem is operating in Dial Backup mode and is configured for EC error control and data compression on leased lines Standby The modem is operating in Dial Standby mode and is configured for EC error control and data compression on leased lines Call Failure Busy Signal The answering modem is busy Delayed As a result of failed call attempts this number cannot be called at Number t this time Please try again later Dial Line in Use The modem is operating on dial networks when another call attempt is issued Forbidden Number t As a result of failed call attempts this number cannot be called again Invalid Number The modem has dialed a telephone number not stored in a directory location Line The line is being used by the associated telephone Occupied No Answer The answering modem did not answer within the time limit specified Tone by the No Answer Timeout configuration option The network tones if any could not be interpreted by the modem MR Modem Rate indicates the data rate the modem is using One of the following values appears 300 1200 2400 4800 7200 9600 12 0 12 000 14 4 14 400 16 8 16 800 or 19 2 19 200 bps EC Error Control indicates the modem is online and using V 42 or MNP e
208. ndicates the line condition is bad 222 indicates the line condition is unknown Lease Lookback has not had enough time to make an initial appraisal of the line conditions since the last retrain blank indicates the Lease Lookback option is disabled Line Dial Only No second screen NOTE When the modem is configured for Dial Only display there is no backup NOTE The leased line interface is disabled when the factory default options are loaded from the Async Dial Sync Dial or UNIX Dial templates Line No Sync No second screen NOTE No Sync appears when the modem is not display trained on either the primary or backup line facility To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Options The Options Status function displays all optional firmware features currently installed in the modem If no firmware options are installed None Installed appears on the LCD To access Options from the Status branch make the following sections Status A DTE CA En mJ Options Press the key until Options appears Select Options 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 23 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Options Status gt A v 33 A L8 L8 If optional features are installed in the modem they appear on the LCD s bottom line If other features are installed
209. nding to the monitor displaying all the characters being transmitted A screw lock tab installed over a circuit card s latch release tab to prevent the unit from being removed without a tool It is used on SDUs modems and filler panels One of two modem operating modes When in Command mode the modem accepts commands instead of transmitting or receiving data One of five areas within the Configure branch containing modem settings Configuration areas include Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 and Factory Modem software that sets specific operating parameters for the modem Sometimes referred to as straps An outlet on equipment and cables that provides a connection 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 GL 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems constant carrier mode Control Channel CC control modem controlled carrier mode Customer 1 Customer 2 data carrier data compression Data mode DB 25 connector dBm DCE DCP demodulation DevHS Diagnostic Channel DC The modem transmits a carrier signal constantly regardless of RTS The diagnostic interface between an NMS and a network device A control modem polls downstream tributary modems across the analog channel The modem s transmitter turns on and off in response to RTS This mode is used by multipoint tributary modems A user defined configuration area containing customized configuration options for a specifi
210. ne To access Control from the Top Level menu make the following selections Leased 19 2 A Test A 59 Le gt Press the key until Control appears Select Control 3 30 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Speaker Speaker allows you to make temporary adjustments to the modem s speaker volume Upon a reset speaker volume returns to its configured setting For more information on speaker settings refer to the Misc section in Chapter 4 To access Speaker from the Control branch make the following selection Control gt A Speaker Reset 45 lt F1 2 FS gt Select Speaker Speaker Control gt A Off Low Med lt a re n gt Press the gt key and appropriate function keys to choose the desired selection DCP selections are Off Turns the speaker off Low Adjusts the speaker to low volume Med Adjusts the speaker to medium volume High Adjusts the speaker to high volume The message Command Complete appears on the LCD To exit Speaker and remain in the Control branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Reset Reset causes the modem to stop operation and perform a complete program restart The modem begins the power up test sequence that ends with the Top Level menu displayed on the LCD Configuration options stored in an Active Saved configuration area are copied to the
211. ne immediately select Tlk Data and hang up the handset This starts the handshaking sequence between your modem and the remote modem Online 19 2 gt A Call_Setup A lt r If this is successful the modems are in Data mode and OnLine appears on the LCD 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 63 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Manual Dialing When the Remote Modem is Configured for Manual Answer NOTE On both modems the Line Current Disconnect configuration option refer to the Line Dialer section in Chapter 4 must be set to Disable This configuration option does not appear on Models 3910 A1 401 and 3911 B1 001 If you are originating a call using a telephone and the remote modem is configured for Manual Answer perform the following procedure Once the remote telephone is answered by the remote user you must both decide when to place the modems into Data mode You must both select TIk Data at approximately the same time and hang up the handset to begin the handshaking sequence If the handshake is successful the modems are in Data mode and OnLine appears on the LCD NOTE If the remote modem is not a 3900 Series modem then the remote user must consult that modem s operator s manual to perform a similar operation Once the modems are online the status messages listed in Table 3 3 appear on the Top Level display It 15 not necessary to specify an origina
212. nfiguration options for the factory preset configurations An N A indicates that the value for this configuration option does not appear on the LCD when that factory default configuration is selected 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 F 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table F 1 1 of 7 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial a Default Default Default Default Default Default p Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings DTE Interface Async Sync Sync Async Sync Async Async Sync Mode Async DTE Rate N A 19 200 bps N A 19 200 bps 19 200 bps N A Async Data N A 8 N A 8 8 N A Bits Async Parity Bit N A None N A None None N A Async Stop Bits N A 1 N A 1 1 N A DTR Action Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Ignore Standard RS232 DSR Control Standard Forced On Standard Forced On Forced On Standard RS232 RS232 RS232 RTS Action Standard Ignore N A Trib or Ignore Ignore Standard RS232 Ignore Control RS232 RTS Antistream N A N A 10 sec Trib or N A N A N A N A Control CTS Control Standard Forced On Standard Forced On Wink When Standard RS232 RS232 Disc RS232 RTS CTS Delay 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec LSD Control Standard Standard Standard Standard Wink When Standard RS232 RS232 RS232 RS232 Disc RS232 TX Clock Source Internal N A RXC Loop Trib N A N A Internal or Internal Control Backup TX Clock N A N A N A N A N A N A Sour
213. nnections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The Load Number is labeled on the equipment The Load Number LN assigned to each terminal device denotes the percentage of the total load to be connected to a telephone loop which is used by the device to prevent overloading The termination on a loop may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the total of the Load Numbers of all devices does not exceed 100 If your equipment is in need of repair refer to the procedure in the Government Requirements and Equipment Return section earlier in this chapter 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 1 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Technical Specifications Table 1 1 shows the technical specifications for the 391x Series modems Table 1 1 1 of 3 Technical Specifications for 391x Series Modems Specifications Description APPROVALS FCC Part 15 FCC Part 68 UL Model 3910 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier CSA Model 3910 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier DOC Model 3910 Model 3911 Class A Registration Number See label on modem Listed to UL 1950 Recognized to UL 1950 Certified to CSA C22 2 No 950 M89 Certified as a component to CSA C22 2 No 950 M89 Certification Number See label on modem Certification Number See label on modem COMPATIBILITY Leased Line Modulations Paradyne V
214. normal dialing methods as described earlier in this chapter in the Call Setup Branch section A service line is an extra dial line connected to COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier This line is normally shared by up to eight Model 3911 modems installed in either Slots 1 8 or Slots 9 16 However by daisy chaining the service line connector of one Network Interface Module NIM to the service line of another NIM installed in the same carrier you can permit all 16 modems to share one service line The service line can also be extended to other carriers in a cabinet For more information regarding daisy chaining of modems to the service line refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual A service line is ideal for a dial backup of Model 3911 modems operating on leased lines Remember that a service line can back up only one failed leased line at a time To enable Service Line from the Control branch make the following selections Control A ENR CA GC b Press the key until Service Line appears Select Service Line to switch the modem from its normal dial line to the service line Now when the modem places a call instead of using the dial line the call is placed on the service line To disconnect the modem from the service line and resume normal operation press the A key once and the key until DiscServiceLine appears Select DiscServiceLine The call and service line disconnect
215. ns for specific applications e Factory is a read only unchangeable configuration area containing six sets of predefined configuration options labeled Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Trellis Multipoint Async Dial Sync Dial and UNIX Dial If Sync Leased or Async Leased is selected you must choose either Answer or Originate mode If TMp is selected you must choose either Control or Trib Tributary mode These sets contain the most commonly used configurations options for modems installed into these hardware environments These predefined configuration options are intended to give you a head start and only require a minimum of changes to the default settings Factory default settings are listed in Appendix F 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems NOTE If you are using AT commands a period of time can exist in which the contents of Active Operating and Active Saved differ Once you issue an AT amp WO write command however the two storage areas are identical Figures 4 1 and 4 2 graphically display the interaction between the edit area and configuration areas as viewed from the perspective of the DCP and the AT command set CONTENTS OF Active Saved ARE AUTOMATICALLY COPIED TO Active Operating WHEN A SAVE IS COMMANDED VIA THE DCP ON A RESET OR ON POWER UP Active Operating Active Saved Customer1 Customer2 Factory Sync Leased Answer Originate Async Lease
216. ns with 391x Series modems To access DwnLoadSoftware from the Control branch make the following selections Control A Eo EB PALE C Press the gt key until Download Code appears Press any function key to select Download Code The DwnLoadSoftware screen appears DwnLoadSoftware gt A 881 Press any function key to select Clone Remote The next screen to appear is determined by the modem s configuration Refer to the appropriate section Point to Point Broadcast or Multipoint Clone Remote in Point to Point Configurations Before using Clone Remote in point to point configurations perform the following e Make sure the 391x Series modems have an established leased line connection using either V 33 V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 or V 29 modulation refer to the Leased Line section in Chapter 4 or a dial network connection using either V 32 terbo V 32bis or V 32 modulation refer to the Dial Line section in Chapter 4 e Make sure the remote modem s Access From Remote configuration option is enabled refer to the Misc section in Chapter 4 e Make sure the password Remote Access Password configuration option is the same in both the local and remote modems For an example of how to change the password refer to the Editing and Saving a Configuration Option section in Chapter 4 After completing these checks proceed to the section titled Implementing a Clone
217. number 818 2759 0111 or an equivalent customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 crossover cable with DB 25 P plug connectors on both ends to attach to the modems See Appendix C for pin assignments November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Sample Configuration Extended Diagnostics Figure G 7 shows a sample configuration for extended diagnostics Cable 5 Cable 6 Cable 1 Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 2 DC Out DC In Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 DTE Sync Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 DTE Syne Cable 2 Cable 2 494 14593 Figure G 7 Sample Configuration Extended Diagnostics Configuration Options 3910 A Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exception Network position Set to Control 3910 B Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options with the following exception TX Clock Source Set to External Diagnostic Connection Set to Modem DC 3910 C Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exceptions TX Clock Source Set to External Extended Channel Set to Enable Upstream Port Set to Port 1 Diagnostic Connection Set to Modem DC Network Position Set to Continue 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 G 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Cables Adapter 3910 D EH 3910 E G Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 5 Cable 6 Cable 7 871A Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following excepti
218. o 9 data bits Only valid when Error Control configuration option is set to Direct Mode m 6 DirectMode Sets data length to 6 data bits Only valid when Error Control configuration option is set to Direct Mode NOTE If the DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to AT or V 25bis Async then the total character size must equal 10 bits Total character size consists of start data parity and stop bits V 25bis Async must use 7 data bits with even parity and 1 stop bit The total character size for Error Control mode Direct mode or Buffer mode must be 11 bits or less The AT prefix determines the async character length 4 10 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 1 2 of 10 DTE Interface Configuration Options Asyn Parity Bit None Nxt None Even Odd Mark Space This configuration option only appears if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async Asynchronous Parity Bit Determines the type of asynchronous parity bit The parity of the DTE must match the parity of the modem Parity options include None Even Odd Mark or Space m None No parity bit is used m Even Parity bit is set so that total number of 1 s in data bits plus parity bit is even Odd Parity bit is set so that total number of 1 s in data bits plus parity bit is odd m Mark Parity bit is always set to 1 Only valid if Async Data Bits configuration option is set to 7 m Space Parity bit is always set to 0 Only valid if Async
219. o Table 3 7 Press the gt key to display the next screen Status Backup lt A E UIN A L8 8 This screen displays the configuration and condition of inactive line facility either primary or backup There are four condition codes Good Bad blank Table 3 7 provides information about the Status Backup screens The first column lists all possible configurations for the modem s currently active line The second column lists all possible configurations for the modem s inactive lines The third column provides information about the inactive line condition XXXX represents the condition code of the inactive line 3 22 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Table 3 7 Backup Status Screens Active Line 1st Screen Display Inactive Line 2nd Screen Display Possible Inactive Backup Line Condition LinezPri 4w APL or Line Pri 2w APL Bckup 2wAPL XXXX or Bckup Dial Good indicates that line continuity is detected Bad indicates that line continuity is not detected 222 indicates that the line condition is unknown Backup Facility Check is making its first determination of the line conditions since the last retrain blank indicates that the Backup Line Check option is disabled Line Bkup 2w APL or Line Dial Backup Pri 4w APL XXXX or Pri 2w APL XXXX Good indicates the line condition is good Bad i
220. o disconnect if no data is transmitted and received within a specified amount of time m Disable Modem remains connected despite the lack of data flow m 10 30 60 min Modem disconnects if data is not received and transmitted within 10 minute 30 minute or 60 minute intervals NOTE The factory default value is country dependent The AT command for Enable is Tn where n is from 1 minute to 255 minutes The AT command for Disable is TO Auto Make Busy Disable Nxt Disable Enable This option is only valid with the Model 3911 and does not appear on the Model 3910 s LCD Automatic Make Busy Forces the modem to go off hook under the following conditions if a local analog loopback is performed a self test is performed or if the modem is switched to the service line NOTE This configuration option should only be used when the modem is located behind a user s Private Branch Exchange PBX The Make Busy Network Interface Module NIM must be installed on the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual The AT command is S Register S40 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable 4 28 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 3 5 of 5 Line Dialer Configuration Options MakeBusyVia DTR Disable End Disable Enable Make Busy Via DTR Determines if the modem goes off hook when DTR is OFF Enable this setting if the DTE normally keeps DT
221. o network devices used to extend the NMS diagnostics to downstream devices GL 4 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Glossary dial command modifiers dial line dial network Dial Standby dial string digital signal directory location DOC download downstream modem DTE edit area EIA EIA 232 D RS 366 A error control escape sequence extended circuit A modifier used in the dial string that instructs the modem how to process a dialed telephone number A communications circuit that is established by a switched circuit connection in the dial network See PSTN A function available when the modem is operating in Dial Backup mode allowing the modem to switch back to lease line operation while still maintaining the dial line connection A series of characters that consists of numbers and modifiers used to dial a telephone number A discrete signal Compare with analog signal Nonvolatile memory that stores up to ten telephone numbers Each directory location can have up to 40 characters entered Canadian Department of Communication A process that transfers modem firmware from a locally attached PC to a modem or allows the cloning of firmware from a local modem to a remote modem A device connected farther from the host computer The equipment Data Terminal Equipment such as a computer or terminal that provides data in the form of digital signals A temporary work are
222. of RTS Gn Modem to Modem Flow Control Configure Edit G0 Disable V42 MNP Buffer G1 Enable Kn Buffer Control Send Break Control Break Forces Escape Break Buffer Control Configure Edit Break Buffer Send Break Break Forces Control Control Escape V42 MNP Wo Discard Data Break First Enable Send Pieak K1 Discard Data Break First Disable Control 3 K2 Keep Data Break First Enable Configure Edit K3 Keep Data Break First Disable V42 MNP Buffer K4 Keep Data Data First Enable K5 Keep Data Data First Disable Break Forces Escape Configure Edit DTE Dialer Nn Error Control Mode Configure Edit WO Buffer Mode VAeIMNP Bulter N1 Direct Mode N2 MNP or Disconnect N3 MNP or Buffer N4 V 42 MNP or Disconnect N5 V 42 MNP or Buffer N6 LAPM_or_Disc N7 LAPM_or_Bufr Qn Flow Control of DTE Flow Control of Modem Configure Edit V42 MNP Buffer Flow Control Flow Control of DTE of Modem Q0 Disable Disable Q1 XON XOFF XON XOFF Q2 CTS to DTE Disable Q3 CTS to DTE RTS to Mdm Q4 XON XOFF Disable Q5 Disable XON XOFF Q6 Disable RTS to Mdm 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 5 13 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 3 8 of 8 391x Series AT Commands AT DCP LCD Description Command Command Sequence No Data Disconnect Timer Configure Edit TO Disable Seales Tn Where nis a value from 1 to 255 in 1 minute increments NOTE The factory default value is country dependent XON XO
223. oggle ON and OFF to simulate half duplex operation If RTS Action is set to simulated control carrier then the remote modem s LSD Control configuration option must be set to Simulated Control Carrier Simulated Control Carrier conforms to V 13 specifications This setting is ignored when the modem is configured for Asynchronous mode and RTS CTS flow control is selected m Control Carrier Allows the DTE s RTS signal to control the modem s carrier signal When RTS is ON carrier is present on the VF line When RTS turns OFF carrier is not present This is only valid for V 29 and V 27bis leased line modulations Auto Dial Backup is always disabled for this setting The AT command for Standard RS232 is amp RO The AT command for Ignore is amp R1 The AT command for Simulated Control Carrier is amp R2 The AT command for Control Carrier is amp R3 RTS Antistream 10sec Nxt 10sec Disable 30sec imin 2min 3min 5min This configuration option only appears in TMp Tributary mode or if RTS_Action is configured for Cntl Car V 29 and V 27bis Request to Send Antistreaming If enabled the operation of the antistreaming function is as follows If RTS is ON for a period exceeding the selected time the modem will take over control of the carrier and will force it OFF The modem will also force CTS OFF during this time This condition will stay in effect until the DTE turns RTS OFF After this the next time the DTE turns RTS ON carrier will be turned
224. onfiguration option allows the modem to test the primary 4 wire leased lines for connectivity by detecting line energy across the normal line bandwidth This test of the primary lines will not interrupt the data flow on the backup lines The configuration option settings must be the same at both ends 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 37 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 5 6 of 6 Leased Line Configuration Options Dual Leased Ln Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available when the Dual Leased Line device option is installed Dual Leased Line Allows the 2 wire backup facility to function as a 2 wire leased line facility When this configuration option is disabled the backup facility is a 2 wire dial line NOTE Plug the leased line into the jack labeled DIAL on the rear panel of the modem Except for dialing ring indication and call progression functions you control the backup function as if it were a normal dial backup NOTE Once the Dual Leased Ln configuration option is enabled the Bakup TXCIk Src configuration option can be enabled BackupLineCheck Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available when the Dual Leased Line device option is installed BackupLine Check Tests the backup circuit for availability while the modem is operating on the primary leased lines The test involves detecting line energy across the normal bandwidth This test of the
225. ons TX Clock Source Set to RXC Loop Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options with the following exceptions Diagnostic Connection Set to Modem DC Network Position Set to Control Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTF1 2 3 or 4 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Use part number 818 2759 0111 or an equivalent customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 crossover cable with DB 25 P plug connectors on both ends to attach to the modems See Appendix C for pin assignments Use part number 125 0040 0031 a 6 position 6 wire modular cord Attach this to the CCIN DCOUT port of the 3600 Hubbing device Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord Attach this to the CCIN DCOUT port of one 3600 Hubbing device and to the CCOUT DCIN port of the second device Use part number 002 0026 0031 Feature number 4400 F1 590 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Equipment List H Equipment Feature Part Number Model 3910 3910 A1 XXX Model 3911 3911 B1 XXX 6 position 4 wire modular cord 7 foot length 125 0067 0031 8 position 8 wire modular cord 14 foot length 125 0053 1431 Universal Power Supply 327 0074 XXXX 3600 Hubbing Device 36
226. onse is issued to the DTE if the modem fails a CRN or CRS command CFI is similar to the AT result codes BUSY NO ANSWER NO CARRIER NO DIALTONE and ERROR The CFI response format is CFIxx Where xxis ET is Engaged tone NS is Number not stored CB is Local DCE busy RT is Time out on ring tone AB is Abort call on time out NT is Answer tone not detected FC is Forbidden call D 2 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 CCITT V 25bis Dialing Commands and Responses ET is similar to the Call Failure Messages Busy Signal and Trunk Busy and the result code BUSY NS is similar to the Common Operational Message Invalid Number and the result code ERROR CB is similar to the Call Failure Messages Dial Line in Use and No Dial Test and the result code ERROR RT is similar to the Call Failure Message No Answer Tone and the result code NO CARRIER AB is similar to the Call Failure Messages No Dial Tone and No Dial DTR and the result code NO DIALTONE and ERROR NT is similar to the Call Failure Message No Quiet Answer and the result code NO ANSWER Call Connecting CNX The CNX response informs the DTE that the modem has connected to the remote modem CNX is similar to the AT result code CONNECT The CNX response format is CNX Delayed Call Indicator The DLC response is issued to the DTE if the modem is not currently allowed to call the number DLC is similar to the AT result code DELAYED The DLC response format is DLCn W
227. ools for a data communication network consisting of software programs and dedicated computer hardware A telephone or modem is being used A telephone or modem is not being used The modem is in a state where it is ready to transmit a call In a dial network it is the modem that makes the call In a leased line network it is one of two sides of the network that is selected to be the originating modem A way of checking data accuracy by counting the number of bits that have a value of one Telephone switching equipment Private Branch Exchange dedicated to one customer A PBX connects private telephones to each other and to the public dial network A dial modem operating mode characterized by a fixed output power level of 9 dBm A rapid or repeated shifting of the relative phase of a signal resulting in unwanted distortion The diagnostic address of a control modem derived from its location in the carrier its carrier and slot number A line or circuit connecting two stations A list containing the network management addresses of downstream modems A test that checks most hardware components when the modem is powered on A three digit code indicating the modem s highest VF data rate The rules for timing format error control and flow control during data transmission Public Switched Telephone Network A network shared among many users who can use telephones to establish connections between two points Also known a
228. operation m Ignore Modem assumes DTR is always ON This is used when the DTE does not provide DTR m Standard RS232 Allows the DTE to control DTR to the modem as specified in EIA 232 D and CCITT V 24 specifications If this signal is not present the modem will not answer or dial m Controls On Hook Required for applications in which the host processor must reset itself for the next session before the current session is terminated When selected the modem does not disconnect from the VF line during an active call until DTR is lowered by the attached DTE This setting is ignored if the modem is commanded to disconnect from its own front panel or by the COMSPHERE 6700 Series Network Management System m Controls Transmitter Mute Mutes the transmitter whenever DTR drops on the DTE interface This selection can be used on the answer side modem to force the originate modem to initiate a dial backup NOTE If V 25bis mode is used then this configuration option must be set to Stndrd RS232 The DTE must provide DTR to dial or answer a call NOTE When operating over the dial network this selection forces DTR Action to behave as CT108 2 Data Terminal Ready If DTE Dialer Type configuration option is set to DTR Direct 1 then DTR Action behaves as CT108 1 Connect Data Set to Line NOTE Only the Stndrd RS232 setting is allowed in Austria The AT command for Ignore is amp DO The AT commands for Standard RS232 are amp D1 or amp D2 The
229. ork Management Configuration Options 3911 Use Sync Leased Answer default configuration options 3910 Use Sync Leased Originate default configuration options Cables Cable 1 Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTE1 Cable 2 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED Cable 4 Use part number 835 1224 1011 10 feet part number 125 0040 0031 12 feet part number 835 1224 2511 25 feet part number 835 1224 5011 50 feet or an equivalent pin to pin 6 position 6 wire modular cord The maximum cable length is 50 feet G 6 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Sample Configuration Extended Multipoint Figure G 6 shows a sample configuration for extended multipoint applications 19200 V321 19200 V321 4800 TX x 4800 4800 1 Leased Sync DTE i 2 A i pou Sync 4800 Eus 3920 k 4800 DTE 4800 Sync Cable 2 Cable 2 4800 DTE Cable1 Cable1 Sync Cable1 Cable1 Cable1 Cable 1 4800 Cable1 Cable 5 4800 4800 Vs T Leased TX DTE 3910 3910 B Sync
230. ory locations RLNx Where x is a directory location List Delayed Numbers Response LSD LSD is a response to an LSD command issued by DTE LSDx n d Where x is a sequence number not a directory location n is the telephone number d is the delay in minutes List Forbidden Numbers Response LSF The LSF response format is LSFx3n Where is a sequence number not a directory location n is the telephone number List Stored Numbers Response LSN LSN is a response to an RLN command issued by the DTE If a directory location is specified then the telephone number for that location appears If no directory location is specified then all telephone numbers stored in memory appear The LSN response format is LSNx n 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 D 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Command Response Valid VAL Invalid INV A Command Response indicates that the command entered was a valid or invalid entry Command Response includes Valid VAL and Invalid INV The VAL response indicates that the modem has accepted the V 25bis command issued by the DTE VAL is similar to the AT result code OK The INV response indicates that the modem has received an incorrect V 25bis command from the DTE INV is similar to the AT result code ERROR The INV response format is INVxx Where 18 CU command unknown MS message syntax error PS parameter syntax error PV parameter value error Table D 1
231. ough the DCP menu Liquid Crystal Display A thin sandwich of two sealed glass plates containing liquid crystal material When voltage is applied the amount of light able to pass through the glass plates is altered so that messages may be written on the display November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Glossary leased line LED Link local analog loopback long space disconnect loopback test menu tree mixed inbound rates MNP modem modulation multiplexer mux multipoint line network network management address NIM non linear distortion A private telephone line connection exclusively for the user No dialing is necessary Light Emitting Diode A light or status indicator on the DCP that glows in response to the presence of a certain condition e g an alarm The physical connection between one location and another used for data transmission See Channel The modem s transmit VF signal is looped to its receiver A disconnect can occur if the modem receives an extended space from a remote modem for example when a remote modem is commanded to disconnect it transmits a continuous space to the local modem before disconnecting Any test that verifies a device s integrity by connecting the device s output to the device s input then checking the received signal for errors The structure containing the menu hierarchy starting at a Top Level menu and extending down to various modem functions
232. p TMp Tributary V 32bis Autorate Enable Enable N A N A N A N A V 32bis Override Disable Disable N A N A N A N A Leased Transmit 0 dBm 0 dBm 0 dBm N A N A N A Level 3 Auto Dial Backup Disable Disable Disable N A N A N A Auto Dial Disable Disable Disable N A N A N A Standby Special Standby Disable Disable Disable N A N A N A Dial Standby 10 min 10 min 10 min N A N A N A Time Carrier On Level 43 dBm 43 dBm 26 dBm TMp N A N A N A Control or 43 dBm TMp Tributary V 27bis Train N A N A N A N A N A N A V 29 Train on N A N A N A N A N A N A Data V 29 Retrain N A N A N A N A N A N A V 29 Link N A N A N A N A N A N A Configuration TMp Train Time N A N A 50 N A N A N A TMp Tx N A N A Enable N A N A N A Preemphasis Lease Lookback Disable Disable Disable N A N A N A Dual Leased Line Disable Disable Disable N A N A N A Backup Line Disable Disable Disable N A N A N A Check 1 This configuration option is country dependent 3 Except in North America this configuration option is not changed by loading factory default configuration options 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 F 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table F 1 5 of 7 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TMp Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial 9 Oian o Default Default Default Default Default Default Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings V 42 MNP Buffer Error Control N A Direct V 42 MNP or N A Direc
233. p Async Dial UNIX Dial Sync Dial 9 e Default Default Default Default Default Default Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Settings Misc Straps When No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change No Change Disconnected Speaker Control Speaker Volume Access from Remote 4 Remote Access Password2 4 Directory Location No 1 Callback NMS Call 24 Network Position Identification Network Management 24 Diagnostic Connection Link Delay seconds On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress Tributary 3910 or Control 3911 256 Modem DC On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress N A 256 Modem DC On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress Tributary TMp Trib or Control TMp Control 256 Modem DC NMS CC for TMp Control or Disable for TMp Trib 0 On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress N A 256 Modem DC On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress N A 256 Modem DC On Until Carrier Medium Enable 00000000 Disable Call Connect amp Progress N A 256 Modem DC 2 This configuration option does not appear on Models 3910 A1 401 and 3911 B1 001 This configurat
234. panel power switch to the OFF position 2 Disconnect the power cord from the ac power outlet and then disconnect the dc power cable from the connector on the rear of the modem 3 Disconnect the leased line and dial modular cords from the modem s rear panel 4 Disconnect the DTE interface cable from the modem s rear panel If the modem is to be removed for service return it to the company using the procedures described in Government Requirements and Equipment Return in Chapter 1 5 Install the replacement modem as described in the Model 3910 Modem Installation section of this chapter and configure it the same way as the modem being replaced Model 3911 Modem Installation CAUTION If the Model 3911 is removed from the carrier always use a ground strap when handling the modem Always store the Model 3911 in an antistatic bag when it is removed from the carrier The Model 3911 is designed for installation in a COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier which supplies both the operating power and the leased and or dial network connections For additional information about the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier refer to the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Installation Manual The COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier has 17 slots which can hold up to 16 modems and one shared diagnostic unit SDU The SDU is required when the modems in the carrier are controlled by an NMS or when multiple carriers in a cabinet configuration are to be controlled b
235. press the gt key to scroll other features into view To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Record Record is a troubleshooting tool used by the end user in conjunction with support personnel This function allows the end user to retrieve and report any sequence faults to support personnel A sequence fault is an irregular or unexpected event There are two selections under Record Display and Clear Display allows up to eight sequence fault messages that have been recorded by the modem to be displayed on the LCD If no sequence faults have occurred then Modem O K appears Clear is used to remove all sequence fault messages from nonvolatile memory and the LCD To access Record from the Status branch make the following selections lt ZN Options Record A m le Press the key until Record appears Select Record Record Status CA Clear A To display sequence faults select Display Record Number 1 2 Modem O K 2 L8 85 3 24 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation The LCD displays the first sequence fault field Sequence fault fields range from 1 to 8 and are identified by a number in the upper right corner Press the gt key to view the remaining fields The message Modem O K appears if no sequenc
236. r Answer A e m A n The modem goes off hook and attempts to establish a connection in Answer mode The Command Complete status message appears on the LCD To exit this function and remain in the Call Setup branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Dial Standby Return to Dial When the modem is operating in Dial Backup mode DialBckUp Dial Standby and Return to Dial allow the modem to switch back and forth between primary leased line and primary leased line backup operation while still maintaining the backup connection Figure 3 10 Switching between backup and primary leased line operation can be performed manually or automatically Refer to the Leased Line section in Chapter 4 to enable the Automatic Dial Backup configuration option 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 57 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems DIAL BACKUP LINE DIAL j RETURN STANDBY TODIAL X X LEASED LINE FAILURE 496 13081 01 Figure 3 10 Dial Backup Under normal backup conditions when a problem occurs on the primary leased line the modems establish a connection over the backup network Call Setup A Dial Standby lt re nj When this occurs Dial Standby appears on the LCD in the Call Setup menu branch If you select Dial Standby the modem switches back to the primary leased line while still maintaining the backup
237. r that tells the DTE or modem to stop transmitting data A character that tells the DTE or modem to start or resume transmitting data November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Index Abort test 3 46 3 47 ac power requirements 1 9 Active Operating configurations 4 1 Active Saved configurations 4 1 address network management 3 26 4 50 analog loopback test 3 48 3 49 answer access security 6 2 6 4 answering a call auto answer 3 63 4 25 manual answer 3 57 3 64 4 25 approvals 1 8 ASCII characters table E 1 E 4 asynchronous character format 4 10 4 11 asynchronous operation 2 6 4 1 4 10 AT commands command list 5 4 5 14 configuration option 4 20 operating modes 5 1 result codes 5 3 5 4 using commands 2 7 2 8 4 2 4 3 5 1 5 2 automatic rate control 4 35 backup dial 2 4 3 35 3 54 3 57 3 59 B 2 leased 1 2 2 4 3 54 status 3 21 Bell 103J 4 30 212A 4 30 Bisync 4 20 D 1 busy control 3 34 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 Index 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems cables 2 4 2 5 H 1 Call Setup branch 3 8 3 54 3 62 Canadian government requirements 1 7 Clone Remote 3 36 3 42 compatibility 1 8 COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier Model 3911 installation and removal 2 9 2 12 network interface module NIM 2 2 3 35 service line 3 35 configuration options defaults 2 6 2 8 4 1 F 2 F 7 quick display 3 14 tables Dial Line 4 30 4 32 DTE Dialer 4 19 4
238. rdware components Call Setup Off Hook The modem is off hook and waiting to dial a telephone number Dialing The originating modem is dialing a telephone number Remote Ring The remote modem is ringing Training The modem is training or retraining EC Negotiating The local and remote modems are negotiating the highest possible level of error control compatible between both modems Once a level is selected this LCD message disappears MR Modem Rate indicates the data rate the modem is using One of the following values appears 300 1200 2400 4800 7200 9600 12 0 12 000 14 4 14 400 16 8 16 800 or 19 2 19 200 bps EC Error Control indicates the modem is online and using V 42 or MNP error control One of the following values appears after the modem rates listed above MNP2 MNP3 MNP4 MNP5 V42 V42b or NoEC NoEC indicates the modem is connected in Buffer mode rather than error control If an EC value does not appear then the modem is in Direct mode The Alarm Status Messages only appear when the Normal Operation Status Messages appear the LCD alternates between the two message sets The Training message may also appear in normal Trellis Multipoint TMp operation 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 3 3 2 of 4 Top Level Menu Status Status Message Indicates Dial Backup or Standby MR The modem is operating in Dial Sta
239. re The menu tree is a hierarchical structure used to display functions that configure and control local and remote 391x Series modems It is accessed via the DCP and is shown in Appendix A Status Displays the current status of the modem along with the data rate and the error control mode The menu tree contains the following branches Status Configure PList Control Test SubHS Call Setup Talk Data Security Remote Used to monitor the current status of the VF line and DTE interface as well as view the identity of the modem Used to change and save the modem s configuration options Poll List Used to identify downstream modems in order to support multipoint health and status polling and multipoint link download broadcasting Used to control the modem s hardware and software functions Used to begin and end various modem tests Sub Network Health and Status Used to display alarm conditions in downstream modems Used to dial disconnect and answer telephone calls as well as store up to 24 telephone numbers in directory locations Used to switch the modem between Talk mode the modem is disconnected from the VF line and Data mode the modem is connected to the VF line when dialing via either the DCP or a telephone Used to control the modem s dial access security Used to access and control a remote 3900 Series modem 3 8
240. regarding default factory configuration options Using AT Commands When using AT commands the following criteria must be met e Make sure the asynchronous DTE s communication software is configured for 10 bit character format for example 8 data bits no parity and 1 stop bit e Make sure the DTE cable is attached to the DTE connector on the rear of the 391x Series modem and to the correct serial communications port on the asynchronous DTE e Configure the modem for Async Dial Async Leased or UNIX Dial as described earlier in Using the DCP To verify that the modem is connected and functioning properly enter the following TYPE AT PRESS Return Enter The screen displays OK If the modem does not return OK refer to Appendix B Troubleshooting NOTE If the factory preset configuration is something other than Async Dial Async Leased or UNIX Dial you do not have AT command control To regain AT command control select via the DCP the Async Dial factory preset configuration as described earlier in Using the DCP 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 2 7 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To change a factory template using AT commands perform the following steps For more information on changing factory templates using AT commands refer to Chapter 5 AT Command Set and S Registers 1 Use the AT amp F amp W command to load the appropriate factory configuration to the appropriate storage area Enter the follo
241. remote LCD s bottom line displays the status of the download process and the number of records sent versus the total number of records for that bank For Single download applications if the download is successful the local modem displays Remote Clone OK and the remote modem displays Frmware Upgrade If the download took place over the dial network the modems disconnect when the download is complete If the Single download is unsuccessful RemClone Failed appears on the LCD s top line Attempt another download from the local modem If this fails contact your service representative VF Thresholds Update The VF Thresholds Update function allows you to set the thresholds that determine the Health and Status alarm conditions for the VF parameters The following thresholds may be edited RSL High RSL Low Sig Noise NonLinear Retrains 15min Signal Quality Near Echo and Far Echo For Health and Status alarm conditions refer to Table 3 6 in the Device Health and Status DeviceHS section of this chapter To access VF Thresh Update from the Control branch make the following selections Control A VF_Thresh_Update CA 2 re 8 gt Press the key until VF_Thresh_Update appears Press any function key to select VF Update VF Thresholds Save x Lm e nj mJ Select Edit In the following example the RSL High threshold is changed from 09 dBm
242. rn to the Top Level menu press 2 key Call Setup Branch The Call Setup function is not available in TMp Control mode For dial backup applications the Call Setup branch of the Top Level menu allows you to dial disconnect and answer telephone calls For leased backup applications the Call Setup branch allows you to switch between the primary leased line and the backup leased line In leased backup operation a 2 wire leased line is used as the backup facility instead of the normal 2 wire dial line Plug the leased line into the jack labeled DIAL on the rear panel of the modem and enable the Dual_Leased_Ln configuration option Refer to the Leased Line section in Chapter 4 for configuration options Except for dialing ring indication and call progression functions you control the backup function as if it were a normal dial backup 3 54 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Sees A sv ea a Dial Call Setup Backup only Dial Disconnect Answer Dial Standby Change Directory X Directory Status or Does not appear Return to Dial in North America Directory Locations 1 24 To access the Call Setup branch from the Top Level menu make the following selections Leased 19 2 A Press the key until Call Setup appears Select Call Setup Dial For dial backup applications Dial allows you to dial any telephone n
243. rol characters are processed and passed on to the remote modem The AT command for Disable is VXO The AT command for Enable is X1 Mdm Mdm FlowCtl Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option is only available if Async Sync Mode is configured for Async and Error Control Mode is configured for V42 MNPorBfr MNP or Buffr LAPM or Bufr or BufferMode Modem to Modem Flow Control If a modem s buffers begin to fill due to data it is receiving from the remote modem but is not passing on to the DTE it can issue XON XOFF flow control characters to the remote modem This only applies if Buffer nonerror control mode is selected If Error Control mode is enabled flow control between the modems will happen automatically regardless of the setting of this option m Disable Modem does not respond to XON and XOFF characters received over the VF line Also the modem will not transmit an XOFF character to the remote end if its receive buffers are full m Enable Modem stops transmitting data to the remote modem if it receives an XOFF character over the VF line An XON character will enable data transmission Also the modem will transmit an XOFF character to the remote end if its receive buffers are full Select this setting if the DTE rate is less than the VF line rate or if the DTE must frequently stop the flow of data to process it The AT Command for Disable is GO The AT Command for Enable is G1 3910 A2 GN32 30 Novem
244. rol panel DCP of the Model 3910 modem Figure 3 1 contains status indicators pushbutton type keys an LCD and speaker grill ci Jg G EB ES 8 c PWR ALRM DIAG DTR RTS CTS TXD LSD SQ TEST RATE DIAL COMSPHERE 3910 108 105 106 103 109 104 142 496 14174 01 Figure 3 1 Model 3910 DCP Model 3911 Faceplate and Shared Diagnostic Control Panel SDCP The shared diagnostic control panel SDCP Figure 3 2 is used to manage carrier mounted Model 3911 modems The faceplate of the Model 3911 contains status indicators that monitor the operation of the modem After the SDCP is connected to the modem the Front Panel indicator of the selected modem lights to show that the modem is connected 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Status Indicators Status The 391x Series modems status indicators continuously provide information on the modem s operating condition All of the status indicators on the Model 3910 appear on the DCP Figure 3 1 whereas the status indicators for the carrier mounted Model 3911 are located on the Model 3911 s faceplate the SDCP and the SDU faceplate Figure 3 2 Status Pwr B 142 Test O Dial 125 RI Busy sev Osa CARRIER SLOTS 1 16 COMSPHERE 3000 496 14175 01 SELECT KEY STATUS KEYPAD LCD INDICATORS OK Alarm BckUp Test P
245. rough 15 in other countries The default is country dependent 5 18 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 AT Command Set and S Registers Table 5 4 5 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S47 Auto Dial Standby Register determines if the modem performs an Configure Edit automatic dial standby if in Dial Backup mode Leased Line Register has the following values 0 Disable 1 15 minutes 2 1 hour 3 4 hours 4 Test 2min 5 Adv 15min 6 Adv 30min 7 Adv 1 hr 8 Adv2minTest The factory setting is Disable S48 Leased Line Carrier On Level Register determines if the modem Configure Edit disconnects if the carrier signal on leased lines falls below 26 dBm or Leased Line 43 dBm Register has the following values 43 dBm 12 26 dBm 2 33 dBm The factory setting is country dependent usually 43 dBm In France the factory setting is 26 dBm in 4 wire operation and 33 dBm in 2 wire operation S49 Buffer Disconnect Delay Register determines how long the modem Configure WEditV continues to transmit data stored in its buffers when the modem is V42 MNP Buffer commanded to disconnect by a locally attached DTE Enter a value from 0 255 seconds A value of 0 disables this register The factory setting is 10 seconds S51 DTE RL CT140 Register determines if the modem performs a Configure Edit remote digital loopback if it
246. rrier is ON the Power LED on the faceplate of the 3911 lights After several seconds the modem completes its power up self test in which all faceplate LEDs light Return to the rear of the carrier and tighten the rear connector plate If the modem is to communicate with an installed SDCB install the modem as described above and perform the following steps 1 2 Press the Select key on the SDCP The cursor appears in the carrier selection entry Press the f or F2 key until the carrier number you want appears on the LCD The carrier number selection has a range of 1 to 8 since a single SDCP can control a configuration of up to eight carriers This is only possible if the SDU is installed Press the gt key to position the cursor on the slot selection entry Press the or F2 key until the slot number you want 1 16 appears on the LCD 2 10 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Modem Installation 5 Pressthe Select key to place the SDCP in direct communication with the selected modem The LCD displays the Top Level menu for the selected modem In addition the Front Panel LED on the modem s faceplate and the OK LED on the SDCP light 6 Once you have determined that the modem is installed properly and completed its power up self test rotate the circuit pack lock until it covers the faceplate latch Figure 2 3 and tighten the retention screw on the circuit pack
247. rror control One of the following values appears after the modem rates listed above MNP2 MNP3 MNP4 MNP5 V42 V42b or NoEC NoEC indicates the modem is connected in Buffer mode rather than error control If an EC value does not appear then the modem is in Direct mode The Alarm Status Messages only appear when the Normal Operation Status Messages appear the LCD alternates between the two message sets The Training message may also appear in normal Trellis Multipoint TMp operation The Delayed Number and Forbidden Number messages appear only in countries where the number of repeat call attempts are restricted The regulations vary in each country If the number is delayed the value of the delay in minutes can be displayed by entering Directory Status see Call Setup Branch The Line Occupied message appears only in countries where the Offhook Detector is enabled The purpose of the Offhook Detector is to detect whether the telephone associated with the modem is off hook It is enabled on a per country basis and this setting cannot be changed by a command The Offhook Detector is enabled in Austria Germany and Switzerland 3 10 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Table 3 3 3 of 4 Top Level Menu Status Status Message Indicates Call Failure No Dial DTR The modem cannot dial because DTR is OFF Cont No Dial Test The modem cannot dial because it is running a Test
248. rs for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations Echo Frequency Offset displays the frequency offset of the far end echo This value appears for V 32 terbo V 32bis and V 32 modulations 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 19 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Identity NonLnearDist Non Linear Distortion displays distortion which is usually associated with pulse code modulation PCM compandor noise on the phone line This value appears for Trellis Multipoint modulation Retrains Retrains displays the number of retrains over the last 15 minutes of operation The total 15 minute accumulation is updated every minute This value appears for Trellis Multipoint modulation To exit VF and remain in the Status Branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Identity displays the modem s serial number model number firmware revision level hardware revision number and firmware part number Retrieval of this information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement modems and or making firmware upgrades To access Identity from the Status branch make the following selection Status a A VF Identity 45 tej Le 8 we Press the key until Identity appears Select Identity Status ldentity gt Z Ser 00000000 A G 8 L8 The modem s serial number appears on LCD s bottom line Press the gt key to scroll and view the
249. rt bit at the beginning of a character five to eight bits and one or more stop bits at the end A group of commands issued from an asynchronous DTE that allow control of the modem while in Command mode All commands must begin with the characters AT and end with a carriage return A prefix issued before every AT command except A and which identifies the DTE s data rate parity and character length The modem automatically determines the asynchronous DTE data rate when using AT commands A capability to respond to a call received over a dial line 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 GL 1 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems automatic dial backup automatic dial standby automatic rate control backbone network backplane baud Bisync bit bps broadcast buffer byte carrier carrier mount When leased line operation fails this function forces the modem to dial the telephone number stored in directory location 1 When operating in Dial Backup mode this function forces the modem to periodically check the quality of the leased line If the leased line is found to be at normal operating condition the modem disconnects from the dial network and continues normal operation over the leased line network Modems adjust their signaling rate based on current line conditions The primary route from a control modem to its first tributary when the communications network contains extended control modems
250. s control at 9 6 kbps tributaries at 9 6 or 7 2 kbps control at 7 2 kbps tributaries at 7 2 or 4 8 kbps control at 4 8 kbps tributaries at 4 8 or 2 4 kbps control at 2 4 kbps tributaries at 2 4 kbps Tributary rates will never exceed control rates If tributary and control rates are equal reducing the control rate will automatically reduce the tributary rate 19200 TMp 14400 TMp TX lt IX DTE TERREA DTE Syn 3910 Z i 3910 B Syne Cable 1 Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 14400 TMp lt TX xx sul DTE 3910 C Sync Cable 2 Cable 1 Figure G 2 Sample Configuration Multipoint Configuration Options 3910 Use TMp Control default configuration options 3910 B Use TMp Trib default configuration options 3910 C Use TMp Trib default configuration options Cables Cable 1 Use a standard customer supplied EIA 232 D V 24 cable with a DB 25 P plug connector at one end to attach to the modem Attach this to the connector labeled DTEI Cable 2 Use part number 125 0053 1431 an 8 position 8 wire modular cord that is supplied with the modem Attach this to the connector labeled LEASED 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 G 3 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Point to Point with Automatic Dial Backup Figure G 3 shows a sample configuration for point to point applications with automatic dial backup Cable
251. s running which blocks the Acquire function The Unable To Acquir message indicates that the diagnostic network is in a busy state S List Acquir aN Abort 2 5 The address field xxx increments sequentially from 001 to 256 as polls transmitted from the modem to the downstream modem s To be added to the modem s poll list the device must respond to a poll after receiving its address The Acquire function can be canceled by selecting Abort 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 29 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems The number field yyy indicates the total number of devices that responded to the modem s polls These devices have been acquired for the poll list Select Abort or allow the function to complete Poll List Acquir aX ERE Acquired A per The number field indicates the total number of devices acquired for the poll list To exit this function and remain in the PList branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Control Branch The Control branch of the Top Level menu allows you to manage hardware and software functions such as speaker volume reset busy out and firmware download 3911 only only Speaker Reset Data Stream EIA LEDs Make Busy Service Line Download Code VF Thresh Update or or DownLoadSoftware RemoveMakeBusy _ DiscServiceLi
252. s which determine how the modem operates These configuration options are accessed by scrolling down and across various levels of the Configure branch Le Configure Ld EditArea frm Activ Operating Active Saved Customer Customer2 Factory Sync_Leased TMp Sync_Dial Async_Leased Async_Dial UNIX_Dial Choose Mode Choose Mode Control Trib Answer Originate Choose Function Edit StrapGroup Save Active Saved Customer Customer2 Async only DTE Interface Line Dialer Leased Line Test Security DTE Dialer Dial Line V42 MNP Buffer Misc 4 4 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration The Configure branch consists of the following three levels e Ld EditArea frm Allows the selection of the Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 and Factory configuration areas e Choose Function Allows you to make changes Edit to existing configuration options or write Save these changes to either the Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 Edit Strap Group Contains the eight software configuration option groups that determine how the modem operates plus the Security group which can be viewed but not changed using this branch Editing and Saving a Configuration Option The following example shows how to change the Remote Access Password using the DCP If you intend to access another 390
253. s dial network An informative display screen available from the modem s Top Level display It provides such information as network position control or tributary network management address DTE mode Asynchronous or Synchronous Line mode Leased Answer Leased Originate or Dial and the modulation scheme used by the modem November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Glossary register Remote remote loopback result code Return to Dial RJ11 RJ21 SDCP SDU secondary channel Select key serial transmission S Registers SubHS synchronous transmission A part of the modem s memory that contains values that determine the modem s operating characteristics A branch of the Top Level menu that permits access to the DCP of another modem A test that sends a signal to the remote modem to test the local modem the remote modem and the circuit between them An asynchronous message in either numbers or words that the modem sends to the DTE after executing or trying to execute a command A function available when in Dial Backup mode that allows the modem to switch to dial line operation when currently on leased lines A type of 6 position jack normally used with permissive dial networks and telephone sets A type of 50 position jack normally used with permissive dial networks providing the appropriate conductors for up to eight telephone lines Shared Diagnostic Control Panel An optional user interface
254. s its own error control or if errors in data can be tolerated This setting is also known as Normal mode and is valid even if the remote modem is set to Direct mode m Direct Mode Modem connects at a data rate equal to or less than the initial DTE interface rate The modem never connects at a data rate greater than the initial DTE rate If the modem connects at a data rate lower than the DTE rate the DTE must then adjust its data rate to equal the modem rate Ultimately the modem speed and DTE speed must be the same Direct mode does not support error control or data buffering m or Disconnect Modem attempts to connect in mode If this fails the modem disconnects m LAPM or Buffer Modem attempts to connect in LAPM mode If this fails the modem connects in Buffer mode NOTE The modem must be reconfigured for Direct mode before changing the leased line modulation if V 42 error control or Buffer mode are enabled with V 32bis or TMp on leased lines 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 39 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 4 6 2 of 8 V 42 MNP Buffer Configuration Options Err Contrl Mode Continued Nxt VA2 MNPorBfr V42 MNPorDsc MNP or Buffr MNP or Disc BufferMode DirectMode LAPM or Disc LAPM or Bufr The AT command for Buffer Mode is WO The AT command for Direct Mode is N1 The AT command for MNP or Disconnect is N2 The AT command for MNP or Buffer is The AT command for V42 MNP or D
255. scape Guard Time To change this value refer to S Register S12 discussed later in Table 5 3 in the S Register Format section To enter online Command mode while in Data mode enter the following sequence TYPE Use command to return to Data mode from online Command mode Enter the following command TYPE ATO PRESS Enter Command Guidelines Review the following guidelines before using any AT Commands e The escape sequence is used to enter online Command mode from Data mode e The asynchronous character format for the AT command set must be one of the following 8 data bits no parity 1 stop bit 7 data bits no parity 2 stop bits 7 data bits parity 1 stop bit parity can be odd even mark or space e All commands except A and must begin with the characters AT and end by pressing the Enter key The AT or at prefix clears the command buffer and matches the modem speed and parity to that of the DTE Commands can be upper or lowercase but the modem will not recognize mixed case prefixes At or aT e Commands can be entered one at a time or in strings Strings can have up to 40 characters after the AT prefix You can use spaces hyphens and parentheses as fillers to make the commands easier to read the modem ignores these fillers and they are not counted among the characters which make up the command string Commands must be entered on one line and end with the carria
256. scape character 43 ASCII can be set to any ASCII value from 0 ASCII to 255 ASCII However the escape character is disabled if a value greater than 127 ASCII is entered When disabled the call must be disconnected to return to Command mode The AT command is S Register S2 n where n is a value from 0 to 127 The AT command to disable is S Register S2 n where n is a value from 128 to 255 When disabled the modem cannot return to Command mode unless disconnected Escape GuardTim 1sec Nxt 1sec 200msec 400msec 600msec 800msec 2sec This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Escape Guard Time Determines the length of the required pause before and after the escape sequence is issued The guard time prevents the modem from interpreting data as the escape sequence characters The AT command is S Register S12 n where n is a value from 0 to 255 in 20 millisecond increments BreakForceEscap Disable Nxt Disable Enable This configuration option only appears if DTE Dialer Type is configured for AT Break Forces Escape Determines whether or not the modem should enter Command mode when it receives a break character from the DTE m Disable A break character is sent to the remote end m Enable Modem escapes into AT Command mode and a break character is not sent to the remote end The AT commands for Enable are KO K2 or K4 The AT commands for Disable are K1 K3 or K5 CommandCharEcho En
257. se this for most UNIX applications Follows DTR The state of CTS follows the state of DTR When DTR turns ON CTS turns ON When DTR turns OFF CTS turns OFF Follows RTS The state of CTS follows the state of RTS When RTS turns ON CTS turns ON When RTS turns OFF CTS turns OFF NOTE When CTS flow control or CTS RTS flow control is enabled CTS will turn ON and OFF regardless of the setting of CTS Control The AT command for Forced On is DO The AT command for Standard RS232 is D1 The AT command for Wink When Disconnect is 2 The AT command for Follows is D3 The AT command for Follows RTS is 4 RTS CTS Delay Omsec Nxt Omsec 10msec 50msec 150msec 600msec Request to Send Clear to Send Delay RTS CTS Delay sets the delay time between the modem receiving RTS from the DTE and the modem sending CTS to the DTE NOTE This delay is only valid in Async Direct mode and synchronous applications when it is necessary to have a short delay between the time the DTE raises RTS and the time the modem presents CTS to allow the DTE to send data NOTE For this configuration option to be valid both the RTS Action and the CTS Control configuration options must be set to Stndrd RS232 If RTS Action is set to Ignore RTS is always ON and this configuration option has no effect The AT command is S Register S26 n where n is a value from 0 to 255 in 10 millisecond increments 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 15
258. sec 3 1 min 4 2 min 5 3 min 6 5 The factory setting is Disable S74 Network Position Identification Register identifies each modem as Configure Edit either a control or tributary modem Misc Register has the following values 0 Tributary 1 Control The factory setting is Tributary S75 Network Management Address Register determines the modem s Configure Edit network address This address is used when accessing the modem Dial from the 6700 Series NMS Enter a value from 0 network address 001 to 255 network address 256 The factory setting is 0 S76 V 32bis Autorate Dial Line Register determines if Autorating is used Configure Edit on dial lines when connected in V 32bis mode Dial Line Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable S78 V 32bis Automode Dial Line Register allows the modem when Configure Edit operating on dial lines to automatically detect and connect to the Dial Line remote modem s modulation scheme Register has the following values 0 Enable 1 Disable The factory setting is Enable 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 5 23 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Table 5 4 10 of 13 391x Series S Registers S Register Description DCP LCD Command Sequence S82 V 32bis Autorate Leased Line Register determines if Autorating is used on leased lines when connected in V 32bis mode Register has the following values 0 En
259. sition the cursor under the digit that will be incremented Press the F2 f key to increment the digit Press Enter Ent to select the modem that will be accessed by the Remote function Select Channel gt CA Secondary a mj re gt Select Channel lt 2 Prim data A lt F1 F2 F3 If operation over the secondary channel is desired press any function key to select the secondary channel Secondary channel only appears if using V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 or TMp modulation If operation over the primary channel is desired press the gt key until primary displays and press any function key Primary channel operation is not available when initiating a Remote function from a TMp tributary modem Online 14 4 H A Control A lt a re 8 gt If the remote modem accepts the password and the entry is successful the Top Level menu of the remote modem appears on the local modem s LCD An f appears in the upper right hand corner indicating that what is displayed on your LCD is actually the Top Level menu of the remote 391x Series modem If the message Remote FP Busy appears the remote modem s front panel is already in Remote mode 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 67 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems The Top Level menu of the remote 391x Series modem is similar to the local 391x Series modem with the following exceptions The
260. ssword is entered For security configuration options refer to Chapter 6 Dial Access Security 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 4 51 AT Command Set and S Registers CONGIVIEW AC n 5 1 Operans Modes nirera e entr Set aet E 5 1 Switching Between Data Mode and Online Command Mode 5 1 Escape Sequence and Escape Guard Time 5 2 Command Guidelines sis sais beoe parcet drm edere ede e 5 2 EE 5 3 AT Command LAS science dae Cbr DER MR SP RPERHURR S RR ERAS 5 4 AT Command Pott J sace e reme elo onte cen 5 4 SRO LEELEE 5 14 S Register Format i f Rh kh RE 5 15 Overview The AT command set provides an alternative method to the modem s DCP for entering commands that control the operation and configuration of the 391x Series modems This chapter discusses guidelines necessary to operate AT commands as well as listing the modifiers for all AT commands supported by the 391x Series modems AT commands are issued from asynchronous DTEs Operating Modes The 391x Series modem has two operating modes Command mode and Data mode Before a modem goes online establishes a successful connection with a remote modem it is considered to be in Command mode an idle state where you can modify its operating parameters or issue modem commands Any command issued is acknowledged with a response in either words or digits known as Result Codes Re
261. st symbol indicates the signal s activity since entering the DTE status display An asterisk indicates at least one transition while a blank space indicates no transitions The second symbol indicates the state of the interface lead at the sampling time A l solid block indicates a Space or ON condition while an underscore _ indicates a Mark or OFF condition To exit this function and remain in the Status branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key Backup The Status Backup function displays the configuration of the modem s current operating line facility and the configuration and condition of the inactive line NOTE The modem s rear panel has two line interface jacks LEASE and DIAL see Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 The jack labeled LEASE is the APL primary interface and accepts either 2 wire or 4 wire APL The jack labeled DIAL is the backup interface and accepts either 2 wire APL Dual Lease Line or Dial lines 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 21 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems To access Backup from the Status branch make the following selection Press the gt key until Backup appears Status 2 A 8 gt Select Backup Status Backup gt A Line Pri 4w APL A lt nj The configuration of the current operating line facility either APL primary or backup appears Refer t
262. t V 42 MNP or V 42 MNP or N A Direct Mode Buffer Buffer Buffer V 42bis Data N A Enable N A Enable Enable N A Compression MNP5 N A Enable N A Enable Enable N A Compression EC Negotiate N A Disable N A Disable Disable N A Buffer EC Fallback N A N A N A N A N A N A Character Flow Control of N A CTS to DTE N A CTS to DTE CTS to DTE N A DTE Flow Control of N A RTS to Modem N A RTS to Modem RTS to Modem N A Modem XON XOFF N A N A N A N A N A N A Passthrough Modem to Mode N A Disable N A Disable Disable N A m Flow Control Break Buffer N A Keep Data N A Keep Data Keep Data N A Control Send Break N A Data First N A Data First Data First N A Control Buffer Disconnect N A 10 seconds N A 10 seconds 10 seconds N A Delay Maximum Frame N A 256 N A 256 256 N A Size Cellular N A Disable N A Disable Disable N A Enhancement Reduced Async N A Disable N A Disable Disable N A Buffer Size Test DTE RL CT140 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable DTE LL CT141 Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Test Timeout Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Receive Remote Enable Enable Disable Enable Enable Enable Loopback V 54 Address Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable Disable V 54 Device Type N A N A N A N A N A N A F 6 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Default Configuration Options Table F 1 6 of 7 Factory Default Configuration Options Configuration Sync Leased Async Leased TM
263. t take effect until a disconnect occurs NOTE Certain changes to this configuration option will cause the modem to reset m 19200 V32t 16800 V32t 14400 V32b 12000 V32b 9600 V32b 7200 V32b 4800 V32b The modem operates using V 32 terbo V 32bis or V 32 modulation at the data rate selected m 2400 V22bis 1200 V22 1200 212A Modem operates using the modulation and data rate selected m 0 300 V21 0 300 103J Modem operates in full duplex Asynchronous mode These data rates do not support V 42 or MNP error control m 1200 75 V23 75 1200 V23 600 75 V23 75 600 V23 The modem will run in asynchronous semi full duplex mode at the rate chosen The AT command is S Register 541 where n is 1 14 400 V 32bis 6 2400 V 22bis 12 1200 75 V 23 20 19200 V 32 terbo 2 12 000 V 32bis 7 1200 V 22 13 75 1200 V 23 21 16800 V 32 terbo 3 9600 V 32bis V 32 8 1200 212A 18 600 75 V 23 4 7200 V 32bis 10 0 300 V 21 19 75 600 V 23 5 4800 V 32bis V 32 11 0 300 103d 4 30 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Table 4 4 2 of 3 Dial Line Configuration Options V32bis Automode Enable Nxt Enable Disable System 85 This configuration option only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V 32 terbo V 32bis or V 32 data rate V 32bis Automode The modem automatically adapts to the modulation scheme and line rate of the remote modem However t
264. tch to the ON position The modem begins a power up self test in which all DCP LEDs light This test takes several seconds to perform and verifies the operation of most hardware components within the modem If successful the LCD displays Power on Selftst Passed and continues to the Top Level menu screen Power On Selftst A Passed A lt n If a failure occurs during the self test the LCD displays Power On Selftst Failed for several seconds The LCD then displays the Top Level menu screen with the message Power on Fail appearing on the top line of the LCD Although a failure has occurred the modem will attempt to operate This allows you to activate a more thorough self test using the Test branch Refer to the Test section in Chapter 3 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 2 5 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems Selecting Factory Configuration Options After the modem passes the power up self test configure it for operation using one of the six factory preset configurations The 391x Series modems have six factory preset templates that contain the most commonly used configuration options straps for Synchronous Leased Answer or Originate Asynchronous Leased Answer or Originate Trellis Multipoint Control or Tributary Asynchronous Dial Synchronous Dial and UNIX Dial hardware network configurations Your modem ships from the factory with the Synchronous Leased Answer default configuration options
265. ter is used to end DTE Dialer command lines and result codes Enter a value from 0 to 127 for the command end character The factory setting is 13 carriage return key S4 Line Feed Character Register determines ASCII value used as the Configure Edit line feed character DTE Dialer Enter a value from 0 127 for the line feed character The factory setting is 10 ASCII carriage return or line feed The range of allowable values may be restricted in some countries 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 5 15 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems increments the modem waits after receiving RTS before issuing CTS to the DTE Enter a value from 0 255 The factory setting is O Table 5 4 2 of 13 391x Series S Registers DCP LCD S Register Description Command Sequence S5 Backspace Character Register determines ASCII value used as the Configure Edit backspace Backspace key This character moves the cursor to the DTE Dialer left and erases the previous character Enter a value from 0 127 The factory setting is 8 backspace key S6 Blind Dial Pause Register determines how long in seconds the Configure WEdit modem waits after going off hook before dialing a telephone number if Line Dialer using result code X0 X1 or X3 Enter a value from 2 255 seconds The factory setting is 2 S7 No Answer Time out Register determines how long in seconds an Configure Edit originating modem w
266. ther the V 22bis guard tone is disabled set to 550 Hz or set to 1800 Hz m Disable No guard tone m 550 Hz or 1800 Hz When the modem is in Answer mode it transmits the guard tone at this frequency NOTE The V 22bis Guard Tone cannot be disabled in some countries The AT command for Disable is amp GO The AT command for 550 Hz is amp G1 The AT command for 1800 Hz is amp G2 V32bis Train Long End Long Short This configuration option only appears when Dial Line Rate is configured for V 32 terbo V 32bis or V 32 data rate V 32bis Train Controls V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 train time Determines whether minimum or maximum time durations are used during the V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 handshaking sequence for both dial and 4 wire 2 wire leased line applications m Long Selects long train Use this setting whenever far end frequency offset phase roll may be encountered This is usually only required when transmitting over satellite links m Short Allows the modem to train up faster when using V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 modulation The AT command is S Register S43 n where n is 0 for Long and 1 for Short 4 32 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Leased Line The Leased Line configuration options only appear when the Sync Leased factory preset template is selected They are used to configure the modem for operation over leased lines Table 4 5 shows each Leased Line configuration option as it app
267. tices and instructions marked on the product or included in the manual This product is intended to be used with a three wire grounding type plug a plug which has a grounding pin This is a safety feature Equipment grounding is vital to ensure safe operation Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adaptor Prior to installation use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for the presence of earth ground If the receptacle is not properly grounded the installation must not continue until a qualified electrician has corrected the problem If a three wire grounding type power source is not available consult a qualified electrician to determine another method of grounding the equipment Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where persons will walk on the power cord Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous high voltage points or other risks Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel General purpose cables are provided with this product Special cables which may be required by the regulatory inspection authority for the installation site are the responsibility
268. ting or answering modem when dialing via the DCP because the answering modem detects that it is receiving a ringing voltage and automatically defaults to Answer mode Security Branch The Security branch allows you to create edit and save parameters that determine how the modem s security is executed For security procedures and configuration options refer to Chapter 6 Dial Access Security 3 64 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Remote Branch The Remote branch of the Top Level menu allows you to control the remote modem s DCP using the local modem s DCP This function allows you to change configuration options and control test functions in a remote modem Any changes made to configuration options while using the Remote branch are not saved until you exit the Remote branch This function is only available when using either V 32 terbo V 32bis V 32 TMp V 33 or V 29 modulation schemes Choose Address TMp Control only Choose Password TMp only Not in TMp Trib Secondary Prim data blckd ExitRem appears instead of Remote when using Remote Mode The following conditions must be met before using the Remote branch e A connection using either leased lines or the dial network must be established e The Access from the Remote configuration option must be enabled in the remote modem n point to point networks the Remote Access Password configuration option must be the same for both the
269. tion is not available if the LeasedLine Rate is configured for TMp Receive Remote Loopback Response Determines if the modem responds to a request for a remote loopback issued from a remote modem The AT command for Enable is amp T4 The AT command for Disable is amp T5 V54 Address Disable Nxt Disable Address Values This configuration option is not available if the LeasedLine Rate is configured for TMp V 54 Address Determines which remote 391x Series modem is placed into a remote loopback test This test can be either a remote digital loopback or local analog loopback This type of addressing is recommended for use in extended data circuits tail circuits m Disable This is used for normal point to point leased line and dial networks m Address Values 01 03 05 07 09 OB OD OF 11 13 15 17 19 1B 1D 1F 25 27 2B 2D 2F 33 35 37 3B 3D SF 55 57 5B 5F 6F 77 or 7F This configuration option selects the address of a modem that is to be placed into a loopback test This option is used for more complex networks where multiple modems used in extended data circuits tail circuits can be commanded to loopback The AT command for Disable is S Register S53 0 The AT command for V 54 Address is S Register S53 n where nis a value from 1 to 34 V54 Device Type Peripheral End Peripheral Intermediate This configuration option is only available if V54 Address is enabled and the LeasedLine Rate is configur
270. tion key to view the messages associated with these alarms Table 3 6 If needed press the gt key to scroll to additional alarm types If no alarms are present the word Normal appears on the LCD 3 16 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Table 3 6 1 of 2 Health and Status Messages Type Message Indicates Major Device Failure A device self test has failed The probable cause is a modem hardware problem or diagnostic memory failure Facility Fault A severe data transport problem is occurring due to poor line conditions No signal or a very poor signal is being received Streaming DTE The modem is in an Antistreaming condition The RTS input to the modem was held ON for a period exceeding the time selected by the RTS Antistream configuration option Refer to the DTE Interface section in Chapter 4 for a description of the RTS Antistream configuration option Access Security A dial access security alarm is active Refer to the Security section of this table for dial access security conditions Minor VF Threshold One or more of the analog parameter thresholds have been exceeded The probable cause is poor line conditions or improper threshold settings Thresholds may be set through the DCP or NMS commands DTE Alarm One or more of the DTE signals are in alarm mode Refer to the Port 1 section of this table for Port 1 DTE alarm conditions Rate Fallback
271. tions group 4 25 4 29 Load Number LN 1 7 loopback local analog 3 48 3 49 local digital 3 50 3 51 remote digital 3 49 3 50 Index 4 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Index Make Busy 3 34 manual dial See Talk Data menu structure 3 8 quick configuration display 3 14 tree A 1 A 3 messages LCD 3 9 3 14 3 23 3 24 result codes 5 3 5 4 Misc configuration options group 4 48 4 51 mixed inbound rates 1 2 4 34 G 3 model number Mod 3 20 modifiers dial string 3 61 5 5 5 6 modulation schemes dial line 1 8 4 30 5 17 leased line 1 8 4 34 5 18 multipoint operation 1 2 network interface module NIM 2 2 3 35 network management address 3 26 4 50 network management system connection 2 5 operating modes AT commands 5 1 Talk Data 3 8 3 62 3 64 operational messages 3 9 3 14 Options Status branch 3 23 3 24 options strap See configuration options originate access security 6 2 6 16 6 17 part numbers 3 20 H 1 passwords administrative 6 5 6 6 remote access 3 65 3 67 3 68 4 5 4 8 4 49 security 6 2 6 4 6 16 6 17 pattern test 3 51 3 53 phone See telephone external phone numbers See telephone numbers pin assignments C 2 PList Poll List branch 3 8 3 25 3 30 power consumption 1 9 power supply connection 2 5 power up self test 2 5 public switched telephone network PSTN See dial 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 Index 5
272. tive Operating Z2 Loads configuration from Customer 2 to Active Operating Z3 Loads configuration options from Active Saved to Active Operating and performs a reset amp Cn LSD Control Configure WEdit amp CO Forced On LSD ON at all times amp 1 Standard RS232 LSD is ON when the remote modem s carrier signal is detected LSD is OFF when carrier signal is not detected amp C2 Wink When Disconnect LSD normally forced ON turns OFF for approximately one second upon disconnecting amp C3 Follows DTR State of LSD follows state of DTR amp 4 Simulated Control Carrier State of LSD follows state of remote modem s RTS amp C5 DTR Disconnect Off State of LSD follows state of DTR except upon a disconnect where DTR remains ON and LSD turns OFF DTR must then toggle OFF and ON to turn LSD ON Use this setting for AT amp T DATAKIT applications Note that to use this option the DTR Action configuration option must be set to Stndrd_RS232 amp D1 or amp D2 amp Dn DTR Action Configure Edit amp DO Ignore Modem ignores the true status of DTR and treats it DIE Imerace as always ON amp D1 amp D2 amp D3 Standard RS232 DTR Signal is controlled by the DTE amp D4 Controls On Hook Modem does not disconnect from the VF line until DTR turns OFF amp D5 Controls Transmitter Mute Mutes the transmitter whenever 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 5 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems amp L
273. tler oj cect LUUD Rok D eI E Wes 4 38 EHI ero NOI dei dirti d eet 4 46 IMIS oroiga exe eee OS cay Lee Oa PERDE Cae Sa ewe eas 4 48 kien C 4 51 Overview After installing a 391x Series modem its software configuration options must be set using either the diagnostic control panel DCP or the AT command set This chapter describes how to access and use the Configure branch of the Top Level menu via the DCP The Configure branch accesses the Edit Area which is a work space where you view and change any configuration options straps These configuration options are loaded to the Edit Area from one of five configuration option areas Active Operating Active Saved Customer 1 Customer 2 or Factory e Active Operating is a configuration area containing configuration options currently used by the modem When the modem is powered on or when a save is performed the contents of Active Saved are loaded into Active Operating Any changes made using AT commands directly affect this configuration area e Active Saved is a read from and write to configuration option area containing the most recently saved changes made to any configuration options In the event of a power cycle or reset the modem retrieves these settings from nonvolatile memory e Customer 1 and Customer 2 are two additional read and write changeable configuration areas where you can create and store additional configuratio
274. trol modems Add allows you to add the tributary modem to a control modem s poll list This function should be initiated from only one tributary modem at a time To access Add from the Plist branch make the following selections Poll List A Change Add A Be Press the key until Add appears Select Add 3 28 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation Acquire Poll List Add A NI A mj The message Command Complete appears on LCD to indicate that the tributary modem will be added to the control modem s poll list To exit this function and remain in the PList branch press the A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key The Acquire function does not appear in Remote mode Acquire allows you to acquire an active poll list consisting of all modems that are one tier downstream A modem will add to its poll list all downstream devices that respond to a poll To access Acquire from the Plist branch make the following selections List lt ZS Add Acquire A w LJ L5 E Press the gt key until Acquire appears Select Acquire NOTE If an error message OtherTestActive or Unable To Acquir appears on the second line of the LCD move up one level in the menu tree to clear the message and return to the PList Acquire branch The OtherTestActive message indicates that a test i
275. uits with diagnostics e Network management system NMS support through the COMSPHERE 6800 or 6700 Series NMS using Advanced Diagnostic protocol ADp e Complement of self tests local and remote loopbacks e CCITT V 42bis and MNP Class 5 data compression e Virtual error free data integrity with CCITT V 42 and MNP Level 4 error control e Dial access security e Automatic and manual backup with standby capabilities for 4 wire 2 wire leased line applications The backup facility may be either a 2 wire dial line or a 2 wire leased line Multipoint Applications In multipoint applications leased line circuits are used for time sharing the same front end processor FEP port with multiple remote locations The FEP via the control modem regulates traffic on the line by continuously polling the tributary DTE s in a predefined sequence Only one tributary can communicate with the control modem at a given time Modems configured for Trellis Multipoint TMp cannot be used in a point to point constant carrier application Refer to the Leased Line section in Chapter 4 for configuration options Leased Backup Applications In leased backup applications a 2 wire leased line is used as the backup facility instead of the normal 2 wire dial line Plug the leased line into the jack labeled DIAL on the rear panel of the modem see Figure 2 1 in Chapter 2 and enable the Dual_Leased_Ln configuration option Refer to the Leased Line section in Ch
276. umber stored in directory locations 1 24 Any telephone number dialed using the DCP must already exist in a directory location Refer to Change Directory for information on storing telephone numbers in directory locations For leased backup applications Dial allows you to switch to the backup leased line Any directory location may be used The remote modem cannot automatically answer the simulated call Use the Answer function of the remote modem in conjunction with the Dial function to manually switch to the backup leased line To access Dial from the Call Setup branch make the following selection Call Setup gt Dial Disconnect A lt D em nj gt Select Dial to display the first directory telephone number 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 3 55 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems DialDirectory CA hie 01 5551234 A lt 9 e nj mj To view other directory locations select Nxt DialDirectory A Nxt 02 5461879 A JN j gt Once the directory location you want appears on the LCD press the F2 or F3 key to dial the number DialDirectory 01 A E Hook CA er Dy The Call Setup status Off Hook appears during the connection process If the connection is successful one of the Normal Operation status messages Table 3 3 appears on the LCD If the connection is not successful the LCD displays one of the Call F
277. ume Medium Nxt Medium Low High Speaker Volume Controls the level of speaker volume NOTE Speaker Volume can also be temporarily set using the Control branch however a reset or power cycle will restore the modem to the Speaker Control and Speaker Volume configuration option settings The AT command for Low is LO or L1 The AT command for Medium is L2 The AT command for High is L3 Access frm Remt Enable Nxt Enable Disable Access from Remote Determines if your modem s DCP can be accessed by a remote modem via the VF line CAUTION If this configuration option is disabled the modem cannot be accessed by another modem m Enable Allows access from a remote modem m Disable Does not allow access from a remote modem NOTE The remote modem must be a 3900 Series modem The AT command is S Register S55 n where n is 0 for Enable and 1 for Disable RemAccssPasswrd 00000000 Nxt 1 00000000 Remote Access Password Allows the entry of a password for establishing control of a remote modem from the DCP of a local modem The same password must be used in both the local and remote modem CAUTION A remote access password should be selected for security purposes NOTE If the Access from Remote configuration option is set to Disable the password has no effect The AT command equivalent is S Registers S56 n S57 x S58 y S59 z where nis the leftmost pair of digits x is the second pair of digits y is the third pair o
278. urity database containing passwords has been changed Port 1 Rx Data Alarm The DTE port s RXD signal is in an alarm condition Tx Data Alarm The DTE port s TXD signal is in an alarm condition DTR Alarm The DTE port s DTR signal is in an alarm condition CTS Alarm The DTE port s CTS signal is in an alarm condition RTS Alarm The DTE port s RTS signal is in an alarm condition DSR Alarm The DTE port s DSR signal is in an alarm condition LSD Alarm The DTE port s LSD signal is in an alarm condition Auto Stream Dis The modem is in an Antistreaming condition Refer to the Streaming DTE message in the Major Alarm section of this table Disabled The modem s DTE port has been disabled Not supported in every modulation To exit DeviceHS and remain in the Status Branch press A key To exit and return to the Top Level menu press the 2 key 3 18 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Operation VF VF displays the condition of the leased or dial connection To access VF from the Status branch make the following selection c3 Status gt DeviceHS VF A L ee Select VF cz Status VF gt SigQual Excelent 5 lt r nj gt If the modem is receiving a signal the signal quality appears on the LCD s bottom line Press the key to scroll and view the receive signal level signal to noise ratio ne
279. wing TYPE AT amp Fy amp Wn Where yis one of the following Factory configurations 0 for Async Dial 1 for Sync Dial 2 for Sync Leased Answer 3 for UNIX Dial 4 for Sync Leased Originate 5 for Async Leased Answer 6 for Async Leased Originate 7 for TMp Control 8 for TMp Trib NOTE Only amp FO amp F3 amp F5 and amp F6 allow you to use AT commands after saving a factory configuration Any other selection removes AT command control The only way to return to AT command control is through the DCP as described earlier in Using the DCP Where nis one of the following storage areas 0 for Active Saved 1 for Customer 1 2 for Customer 2 NOTE These three configuration areas are nonvolatile memory locations Active Saved contains the most recently saved changes to any configuration options In the event of power loss the modem retrieves these configuration options Customer 1 and Customer 2 are user defined configuration areas PRESS Return Enter 2 The selected factory configuration is saved To establish a connection with a remote modem use the D Dial command Refer to Chapter 5 AT Commands and S Registers for more on AT commands 2 8 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 Modem Installation Removing and Replacing Model 3910 Modems To remove and replace a Model 3910 modem perform the following steps 1 Make sure the modem is offline and press the modem s rear
280. y channel is used Rem_Digital_Loop does not appear in TMp mode Does not appear if configured for Synchronous mode Some choices within this group may not appear depending upon how previous configuration options have been selected 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 A 3 Troubleshooting d TRI d PP ng ig toed eae eT ha 1 Overview This appendix points out basic problems that can occur when operating a 391x Series modem Use Tables B 1 through B 6 to check out these problems If you are having data communication difficulties such as periodic character loss random errors or constant format errors use the loopback tests described in the Test section of Chapter 4 With these tests you can usually isolate the fault in your system by using the process of elimination If problems continue to occur contact your service representative Table B 1 Modem Health Symptom Action The modem did not pass the power up self test Contact your service representative The power LED does not light or the LCD does not display information Make sure the modem s ON OFF switch is in the ON position Make sure the power supply is connected to the dc power receptacle on the modem If the Power LED and or LCD do not operate contact your service representative A problem is suspected after the power up self test Perform a self test via the modem s DCP or type AT
281. y a single shared diagnostic control panel SDCP The SDCP of the COMSPHERE 3000 Series Carrier is the user interface to the Model 3911 modem A single SDCP can control up to eight carriers containing up to 128 compatible modems The installation of a Model 3911 varies slightly if an SDCP is installed on the front of the carrier To install Model 3911 modem into the carrier without an SDCP perform the following steps 1 At the rear of the carrier install the rear connector plate Make sure the plate uses the same slot position as that intended for the modem Loosely fasten the plate This allows for slight adjustments later when installing the modem 3910 A2 GN32 30 November 1996 2 9 COMSPHERE 3900 Series Modems SDU MODEL 3911 MODEM o 2 lt 3000 SERIES C2 CARRIER LATCH 493 13143a Figure 2 2 Installing a Model 3911 Modem At the front of the carrier hold the modem vertically with the latch on its faceplate in the open position and insert it into the top and bottom card guides of one of the slots numbered 1 16 Figure 2 2 Slide the modem into the slot aligning the modem with the rear connector plate until the backplane connector and DTE connector seat firmly into the back of the carrier The faceplate latch automatically closes as you push the modem into the carrier To lock the modem into the carrier press the faceplate latch until a click is heard If the ca
282. y is configured for 15min 1hr 4hr or Test 2min and Leased mode is configured for Originate mode or if Automatic Dial Standby is configured for Adv15min Adv30min Advihr or TestAdv 2min Special Standby Used to support Automatic Dial Standby configurations when a third modem is used for the dial backup When the leased line is restored the Special Standby configuration allows the leased line modems to return service to the original point to point modems NOTE When the modems are set for normal dial standby 15min 1hr 4hr or Test 2min the Special Standby configuration option allows the originate modem to test the lease connection in one direction before interrupting primary data on the dial lines NOTE When the modems are set for advanced dial standby Adv15min Adv 30min Advihr or Adv Test 2min the Special Standby configuration option allows a non interruptive algorithm to test the original point to point lease connection in both directions before interrupting primary data on the dial lines The AT command is S Register S98 n where n is 0 for Disable and 1 for Enable Dial StandbyTime 10min Nxt 10min 5min 1min Dial Standby Time Selects the amount of time that a dial circuit is held after returning to the leased lines CarrierOn Level 43dbm Nxt 43dbm 26dbm Carrier On Level Controls the carrier detection threshold for leased lines When the power level of the receive carrier signal drops 2 dBm below this l
283. yed on the LCD is the current setting If you scroll left or right Nxt disappears and reappears if a new value is selected End appears when you have scrolled down to the last configuration option available in that group Selecting End returns you to the top of the configuration group You are free to enter that group again or scroll left or right to the next configuration options group The 4 key takes you one step up in the Configure branch each time it is pressed The 2 key causes you to exit the Configure branch and return to the Top Level menu If any changes are made to configuration options the DCP allows you to save these changes to either the Active Saved Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration areas The and gt keys move selections across the LCD The function keys F1 F2 and F3 select the LCD choice that appears above that function key 4 8 November 1996 3910 A2 GN32 30 DCP Configuration Configuration Tables DTE Interface The modem s configuration options are arranged into nine groups based on functionality DTE Interface Table 4 1 DTE Dialer Table 4 2 Line Dialer Table 4 3 Dial Line Table 4 4 Leased Line Table 4 5 V 42 MNP Buffer Table 4 6 Test Table 4 7 Misc Table 4 8 and Security Chapter 6 Throughout these tables two selections frequently appear on the LCD Enable and Disable Unless otherwise stated Enable selects a configuration option and makes it available for use

Paradyne 3910 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents